ThinWalled Structures v
Contents
vi ThinWalled Structures
Contents
References 121
Problems 121
EXAMPLE 7.2 A uniform distributed torque acting on a bar with fixed ends. 203
EXAMPLE 7.3 A point torque acting on a bar with fixed ends. 204
Virtual work and strain energy 205
Strain energy density 207
Complementary virtual work and energy 208
Complementary strain energy 209
Unit twist of a single cell beam due to shear flow 210
Hooke’s law 211
Shear straindisplacement relation 212
Tangential displacement of a typical point on the contour 212
Relation between the shear flow and unit twist 214
Uniform torsion of a thinwalled closed section with a contour of arbitrary
shape 215
EXAMPLE 7.4 Torsion of a circular, bimaterial section 218
Shear center of a closed section 219
EXAMPLE 7.5 Shear center location of a singlecell, closed section having one axis of
symmetry. 219
Uniform torsion of multicell closed sections 222
EXAMPLE 7.6 Uniform torsion of a twocell section 225
Resultant of a constant shear flow in a curved branch 226
EXAMPLE 7.7 Torsion of a five cell closed section; circuit shear flow 229
Torsion of hybrid sections 231
References 232
Problems 233
ThinWalled Structures ix
Contents
x ThinWalled Structures
CHAPTER 1 Airplane and ship
structures
The objective of ThinWalled Structures is to provide an understanding of the basic concepts of stress and defor
mation of stiffenedshell structures with applications to aerospace and ocean vehicles. In this chapter we discuss
why a structure carries load, the types of loads acting on airplane and ship structures, the definitons and functions
of principal structural units, and the relation of structural design to the overall design.
Although Galileo (15641642) began an inquiry into the strength of materials, it is Robert Hooke (1635
1702) who is credited with providing the answer as to why structures carry load. A historical account of Hooke’s
discoveries is discussed in chapter two of an informative and readable book on structures by Gordon (1978). Gor
don’s text is the source for what is written here. By Newton’s law of action and reaction we know that isolated
forces do not exist in nature. A force acting on an inanimate solid is reacted by a force produced by the solid. But
how does the solid produce such a reaction force? Hooke in 1676 recognized that every kind of solid changes its
shape when subjected to a mechanical force and it is the change in shape which enables the solid to provide the
reaction force. This shape change extends to the very fine scale of molecules where there is a large resistance to
stretching and compressing of chemical bonds. Hooke’s measurements also showed that many solid materials
recovered their original shape when they are unloaded; i.e, they are elastic. The science of elasticity is about the
interactions between forces and deflections in materials and structures. The formulation of the mathematical the
ory of elasticity for a solid continuum is well established; e.g., see Sokolnikoff (1956). Exact elasticity solutions
are known for a small, but important, number of structural problems. However, the mathematical solutions to
elasticity problems are usually challenging. Approximations to elasticity theory which exploit the geometry and
ThinWalled Structures 1
Airplane and ship structures
material construction of practical structures is called structural mechanics. For example, the structural mechanics
of beams, plates, and shells approximate elasticity by exploiting the fact that one or two dimensions of the solid
body are very small with respect to the remaining dimensions. Structural mechanics reduces the mathematical
complexity somewhat relative to threedimensional elasticity, and it is the theory most often used by the practic
ing engineer.
Two important properties common to the analysis of any structure are stiffness and strength. Stiffness is a
measure of the force required to produce a given deflection, and strength refers to the force, or force intensity,
necessary to cause failure. A criterion for failure is required in order to determine the strength of a structure, and
this depends upon the particular application. For example, failure can be defined when a stress (internal force
intensity) exceeds the yield stress of the material, or failure can mean excessive displacements which occur dur
ing buckling. The stiffness and strength of a structure depend on its geometrical configuration, connections, and
the stiffness and strength of the materials from which it is made.
It is important to recognize that structures are made from materials, and that the history of structures follows
the development of materials and the development of tools to fabricate the materials. The evolution of the air
frame, for example, is tied closely to the introduction of materials and costeffective means for their fabrication.
For example, early aircraft were constructed of wirebraced wood frames with fabric covers. Currently, advanced
composite materials are very attractive for weightsensitive structures, like aircraft, because of their high stiff
nesstoweight and strengthtoweight ratios.
The distinction between structures and materials is not always clear. It may be said that the forwardswept
wing on Grumman's X29 demonstrator airplane is a structure, and the material it is made from is an advanced
composite. However, advanced fiberreinforced composites are made from stiff, strong, continuous fibers embed
ded in a pliant matrix. The complex constitution of an advanced composite, therefore, may be considered either
as materials or structures.
Hence, the basic conceptualizing we make for complex vehicle structures such as aircraft and ships is that a
fuselage, a wing, or a hull is a thinwalled beam. That is, a vehicle structure as a whole is assumed to be a one
dimensional structural element in the mathematical sense that its response under load can be described by ordi
nary differential equations. Aerohydrodynamic and other loads that act on the structure cause extensional, bend
ing, and torsional deformations of the structure. The cross section of the structure is built from many actual
structural elements such as spars, frames, and panels. This beam assumption is particularly suited for the analysis
required in preliminary design. Of course not all principal structural units can be modeled as a beam. In constrast
to a high aspect ratio wing, a delta wing whose span and chord are of comparable value (low aspect ratio) is not
modeled very well by using the beam assumption.
2 ThinWalled Structures
Principal structural units
ThinWalled Structures 3
Airplane and ship structures
Fig. 1.2 Principal structural units of a Douglas airplane (from Aircraft Basic Science, 1948)
1.3 Design
An aircraft or ship may be considered a system consisting of several subsystems; a structural subsystem, a con
trol subsystem, a propulsion subsystem, cargo handling subsystem, etc. Vehicle design must consider the total, or
integrated, system to achieve optimal performance. An important contribution to the overall vehicle performance
is to minimize weight in the structural subsystem design. A minimum weight vehicle structure can carry the same
payload with less fuel consumption. In addition, a lighter structure can reduce operating costs through less main
tenance, and also may reduce initial cost by requiring less labor for fabrication. Modern engineering design has
been revolutionized by the development of highspeed computers combined with optimization theory. As a math
ematical problem in optimization, structural design may be considered as the development of a computational
algorithm for choosing member spacing and dimensions such that weight is minimized (objective) subject to
constraints on strength and stiffness. The role of structural mechanics in this design process is to provide a
description of the state of stress and deformation throughout the structure for a given structural configuration,
such that the constraints can be evaluated. Structural mechanics provides the theory for the analysis of the struc
tural response (state of stress and deformation).
4 ThinWalled Structures
Design
Fig. 1.3 Levels of structural analysis for a large ship (from Hughes, 1983)
The overall dimensions of a vehicle structure are usually determined by more general requirements rather
than for structural considerations. Thus, the structural design begins with the overall dimensions given, and two
levels of design may be distinguished. The first level is called preliminary design, and at this level the locations
and dimensions of the principal structural members are determined. The second level is called detail design, and
ThinWalled Structures 5
Airplane and ship structures
at this level the geometry and dimensions of the local structure like joints, cutouts, reinforcements, etc. are deter
mined.
1.4 Loads
The first step in preliminary design is to determine the external loads acting on the structure. Maneuvering flight
vehicles are subjected to gravity, aerodynamic forces, and inertial loads. In addition, the landing loads, and wind
gust loads during turbulent weather must be considered. Ships are subjected to gravity, buoyancy forces, and
inertial loads. Also, wave loads and other hydrodynamic loads such as slamming, sloshing of liquid cargos, etc.,
must be considered in ship design. The calculation of aerodynamic and hydrodynamic forces are sufficiently
complex such that their determination is done by specialists rather than by designers.
Loads on a vehicle structure may be classified as static or dynamic, and either deterministic or probabilistic.
Gust loading conditions for aircraft and wave loading conditions for ships are not known with absolute certainty,
so that these load magnitudes are estimated on a statistical basis using probability theory together with past expe
rience. The type of loading has a direct influence on the type of structural response analysis required. For exam
ple, dynamic loading requires a structural dynamics analysis.
In traditional structural design most of these loads are not affected by the structural configuration or dimen
sions of the members. They are a function of the wing shape, or hull shape, and other nonstructural factors.
Hence, the determination of the loads, a very crucial aspect of the design process, is essentially a separate task
typically performed by an aerodynamicist or hydrodynamicists. In modern flexible vehicles the loads greatly
influence the shape and so aeroelastic or hydroelastic load analysis must be performed. That is, the structural and
aero/hydrodynamic analysis must be combined to obtain the correct loads. This interaction between the structure
and the shape is so important for flexible vehicles made from composite materials that it is expected that in the
future the shape and structural design will be combined.
The structure of a flight vehicle usually has a dual function: it transmits and resists the
forces which are applied to the vehicle, and it acts a cover which provides the aerodynamics
shape and protects the contents of the vehicle from the environment. This combination of roles
is fortunate since, from the standpoint of structural weight, the most efficient location for the
structural material is at the outer surface of the vehicle. As a result, the structures of most flight
vehicles are essentially thin shells. If these shells are not supported by stiffening members,
they are referred to as monocoque. When the crosssectional dimensions are large, the wall of
a monocoque structure must be relatively thick to resist bending, compressive, and torsional
loads without buckling. In such cases a more efficient type of construction is one which con
tains stiffening members that permit a thinner covering shell. Stiffening members may also be
required to diffuse concentrated loads into the cover. Constructions of this type are called
semimonocoque. Typical examples of semimonocoque body structures are shown in Fig. 75.
While at first glance these structures appear to differ considerably, functionally there are simi
larities. Both have thinsheet coverings, longitudinal stiffening members, and transverse sup
6 ThinWalled Structures
Function of flight vehicle structural members
Longitudinal
stringers
Cover Skin
Transverse
frames
(a)
Cover skin
Transverse
Spar web rib
ThinWalled Structures 7
Airplane and ship structures
8 ThinWalled Structures
Ships’ structures
(b)
Fig. 76 Idealization of semimonocoque structure. (a) Actual
structure; (b) idealized structure
Effective longitudinals
(axial stress only)
axial load, and thermal gradients can be computed from the equations of this chapter if the
structure is long compared to its crosssectional dimensions and if there are no significant
structural or loading discontinuities in the region where the stresses are computed. In many
flight structures the cross section tapers; the effects of this taper upon the stresses are dis
cussed in Chap. 9. When discontinuities or other conditions arise which violate the analytical
assumptions made in the BernoulliEuler theory, it is necessary to analyze the stiffened shell
as an indeterminate structure (Chaps. 11 and 12).
ThinWalled Structures 9
Airplane and ship structures
shows that the slope of the waves at various points in the length of the ship varies, being
sometimes positive and sometimes negative. This means that there are sideways forces acting
on the ship which will not only cause swaying, but also bending in the horizontal plane. This
bending has in the past been neglected and it is safe to say that the forces and moments gen
erated are likely to be of small amount.
Wave crest
Wave crest
Wave crest
Wave crest
Fig. 4 Ship moving diagonally across waves
Referring again to Fig. 5, it will be evident that, because of the variation in the wave slope
at different sections in the length, not only will sideways forces be generated but there will also
be moments applied at the various sections. As these may change sign along the length of the
ship, twisting is possible with the consequent generation of torsional stresses. Once again it is
perhaps doubtful whether this type of distortion is important from the point of view of the
strength of the structure. The problem has been, partially investigated in the past, and at the
present there appears to be some interest in it in view of the tendency to increase the size of
hatch openings, thus reducing the torsional rigidity of the structure.
A.P. F.P.
1/4 length 3 length
/4
Consider now a transverse section of a ship as shown in Fig. 6. This section is subject first
of all to static pressure due to the surrounding water. It will also be subjected to internal load
ing due to the weight of the structure itself and the weight of the cargo etc. which is carried.
The effect of these static forces is to cause transverse distortion of the section, as shown by
dotted lines in Fig. 6. It is worthy of note that this type of distortion would take place regardless
of whether there was bending in the longitudinal direction. It is possible therefore to recognise
an entirely independent study dealing with the transverse deformation of the ship’s structure.
10 ThinWalled Structures
Ships’ structures
Cargo load
Cargo load
Not only do the water pressure and the local internal loads cause transverse bending but it
is possible to have local deformation of the structure due to these forces. A typical example of
this is the bottom plating of a ship between floors or longitudinals. Fig. 7 shows a strip of such
plating between two floors or longitudinals. The tendency is for the plating to bend as a beam
Inner bottom
Floors
Outer bottom
Water pressure
Fig. 7 Distortion of bottom plating due to water pressure
in between these members. Other parts of the structure which could be deformed under local
loads are tank top plating, bulkheads, girders under heavy loads such as machinery etc. In this
way it will be seen that there is another aspect of the strength of the structure which may be
defined as local deformation.
Summarising this section, it is clear that the overall problem of the strength of the ship’s
structure may be conveniently divided into three sections:
(1) Longitudinal strength (2) Transverse strength (3) Local strength
Since any given part of the structure of the ship may be subjected to one or more of the
modes of distortion discussed, it will be seen that the resultant state of stress in that part could
ThinWalled Structures 11
Airplane and ship structures
be very complex. It is for this reason that, in a first study at least of the strength of the ship’s
structure, longitudinal bending, transverse bending and local bending are treated entirely inde
pendent, so that each of the three divisions of the subject of strength of ships quoted above
can be investigated separately. This is the only realistic way of tackling the problem.
It has been shown that the ship is capable of bending in a longitudinal vertical plane and it
follows therefore that there must be material in the ship’s structure which will resist this bend
ing; or in other words there must be material distributed in the fore and after direction to fulfil
this purpose. It follows that any material distributed over a considerable portion of the length of
the ship will contribute to the longitudinal strength. Items which come into this category are the
side and bottom shell plating, inner bottom plating and any decks which there may be. Fig. 8 is
an outline section showing these items. As far as decks are concerned, it is usual to consider
only the material abreast the line of openings, such as hatches and engine casings.
Upper deck
plating
2nd deck
plating
Side
shell
Inner bottom
plating
Margin Centre
plate girder
Bottom shell
It will be clear that this longitudinal material forms a box girder of very large dimensions in
relation to its thickness. Consequently, unless the plating was stiffened in some way it would
be incapable of with standing compressive loads. For this reason therefore it becomes neces
sary to fit transverse rings of material spaced from 2 ft. to 3 ft. apart throughout the length of
the ship. This is the procedure which is adopted in what is usually called a transversely framed
ship. The transverse stiffening consists of three parts; in the bottom between the outer and
inner bottoms there are several vertical plates called floors which have lightening and access
holes cut in them as shown in Fig. 9; in the sides of the ship rolled sections called side frames,
are welded to the plating (see Fig. 9); the decks are also supported by rolled sections welded
to the plating, called beams. The floors, side frames and beams at the various decks are con
nected by means of brackets so that a continuous transverse ring of material is provided. As
stated earlier, the spacing of these transverse rings, usually called the frame spacing, is
between 2 ft. and 3 ft. and depends upon the length of the ship. It will be seen that the effect of
12 ThinWalled Structures
Ships’ structures
supporting the plating in this way is to reduce the unsupported span and hence to raise the
buckling strength of the plating, to enable it to carry compressive loads.
Second deck
beam Hold
pillar
Floor
plate
Tank side Centre
bracket girder
Side girder
Another function of these transverse rings is to prevent transverse distortion of the struc
ture, so that the floors, side frames and beams are the main items contributing to the trans
verse strength of the structure of the ship. The main force involved here is that due to water
pressure and, as this will be greatest on the bottom of the ship, the bottom structure should be
very heavy. This is in fact so, a very heavy girder being provide by the floor plate in conjunction
with its associated inner and outer bottom plating. The side of the ship is also subjected to
water pressure of rather lesser magnitude, and in this case adequate stiffening is provided by
the girder consisting of the side frame welded to the side shell plating. As far as decks are con
cerned, here again the beam with its associated deck plating forms an effective builtup girder.
The main factor determining the sizes of the beams is the load which they have to carry. This
load may be a cargo load, a load due to passengers or, in the case of a weather deck some
weather load.
Other items of the structure which contribute to transverse strength are watertight bulk
heads. Their primary object is, of course, to divide the ship into a series of watertight compart
ments, but since they consist of transverse sheets of plating they have very considerable
transverse rigidity and hence contribute greatly to the prevention of transverse deformation of
the structure.
The structure shown in Fig. 9 is typical of a transversely framed ship. It is common practice
nowadays to adopt a different form of construction in which the sides of the ship are stiffened
transversely whilst the decks and bottom are stiffened by means of longitudinals. This type of
construction is shown in Fig. 10. As will be shown later, the effect of stiffening the deck and
bottom by longitudinal members instead of transverse members is to increase very greatly the
buckling strength of the plating, and it is largely for this reason that this method of construction
has been adopted.Since these longitudinals are effectively attached to the plating they contrib
ute also to the general longitudinal strength of the structures. The longitudinals have to carry
cargo and water pressure loads and so, in order to reduce their scantlings, they must be sup
ported at positions other than at bulkheads. This is achieved by introducing deep transverse
beams in the decks spaced some 6 to 12 ft. apart and by having transverse plate floors in the
ThinWalled Structures 13
Airplane and ship structures
Tween deck
frame
Upper deck
longitudinals
Deep transverses
2nd deck spaced 6 to 12 ft.
longitudinals apart
Side frame
Inner bottom
longitudinals
Outer bottom
longitudinals
Fig. 10 Section through ship with longitudinally stiffened decks and bottom
bottom at the same spacing. These widely spaced transverse members, in conjunction with
closely spaced side framing, then provide the transverse strength of the structure.
The longitudinal system of framing has often also been extended to the sides of the ship
as well as the decks and bottom. In fact when initially developed for use in oil tankers this was
the method which was adopted. This was called the Isherwood System. At a later stage in the
development of the tanker the combined system of longitudinals in the bottom and deck with
transverse side framing was employed. In many of the larger oil tankers of the present day,
however, the complete longitudinal framing system has been used. Figure 11 shows the mid
ship section of such a tanker.
Where transverse beams are employed in the decks of ships it would be impracticable to
14 ThinWalled Structures
Ships’ structures
run these from side to side of the ship without intermediate support. It is therefore necessary
to introduce pillars to support the beams. In the early development of the iron and steel ship
these pillars were closely spaced, generally being on alternate beams with a longitudinal angle
runner fitted under the beams to spread the load to those beams not supported by pillars. This
meant that access to the sides of cargo holds could only be made between two pillars, so that
the available space was only about 5 ft. The later development was to support the deck beams
by one or more heavy longitudinal girders and to support these girders by means of wide
spaced pillars. With this arrangement there would be probably two girders in the breadth of the
ship each supported by two pillars in the length of the hold. Such an arrangement is shown in
Fig. 12. By supporting the deck beams with lines of pillars or heavy longitudinals, the scant
Hatch coaming
Girder
Pillars
Hatch coaming
Girder
Bulkhead
Bulkhead
Pillars
Inner bottom
Outer bottom
Elevation through hold
Pillars
Girder
Deck
beams
Girder
Pillars
Plan at deck
Fig. 12 Widespaced pillar and girder arrangement in transversely framed ship
lings of the beams are greatly reduced and, further, by the use of widespaced pillars access
to the holds is made easy. When longitudinal stiffening of decks is used, the system of con
struction just described can be imagined to have been turned around, The longitudinals
replace the beams and the deep transverse beams replace the longitudinal deck girders in the
transversely framed ship.
In addition to their functions in resisting longitudinal and transverse bending, many of the
parts of the structure referred to in this section have also to support local loads. Thus beams
and girders will often be subjected to loads due to machinery and loads produced by lifting
ThinWalled Structures 15
Airplane and ship structures
equipment such as derricks and the like. The outside plating of the ship has also to withstand
water pressure, and this could produce local bending of the plating between the stiffening
members such as floors and frames. In general it could be said that nearly every structural
member in the ship is a local strength member.
The foregoing discussion has shown briefly the functions which the various parts of the
ship’s structure have to perform. It can be seen that particular part of the structure may have to
perform several functions at the same time. In succeeding chapters methods for determining
the stresses in the various parts will be dealt with in detail.
1.8 References
Anon., Aircraft Basic Science, 1948, First Edition, Northrop Aeronautical Institute, Charles E. Chapel, Chief
Editor, McGrawHill Book Company, Inc, p. 59 & 60.
Gordon, J.E., 1978, Structures: or, Why things don’t fall down, (A Da Capo paperback) Reprint. Originally
published by Harmondsworth: Penguin Books, pp. 3344.
Hughes, O.F., 1983, Ship Structural Design, John Wiley and Sons, New York, N.Y., p. 8.
Muckle, W., 1967, Strength of Ships' Structures, E. Arnold Inc., pp. 512.
Rivello, R. M., 1969, Theory and Analysis of Flight Structures, McGrawHill, pp. 143147.
Sokolnikoff, I.S., 1956, Mathematical Theory of Elasticity, Second Edition, McGrawHill Book Company,
New York.
16 ThinWalled Structures
CHAPTER 2 Bars Subjected to Axial
Loads
A bar is a structural member that is relatively long along one axis and relatively compact in cross section in
planes perpendicular to the axis. Bars can be straight or curved. Bars are among the most widely use structural
elements. In this chapter only straight bars are considered that are subjected to loads directed along the reference
axis of the bar. The reference axis is parallel to the long axis of the bar and will be defined in Section 2.4. Axial
loads applied along the reference axis of a straight bar cause extensional and/or compressive deformations. A
slender bar in compression is likely to buckle and in that case the bar is called a column. Buckling results in a
combination of bending and compressive deformations of the column. Loads applied perpendicular to the refer
ence axis cause the bar to bend, and in that case the bar is called a beam. Beams are the subject of the next chap
ter.
The three basic steps to analyzed the static response of any structure are discussed for a bar in Section 2.1 to
Section 2.5. These three fundamental steps of static structural mechanics are
• equilibrium conditions,
• straindisplacement conditions, or conditions of geometric fit, and
• a material law, or constitutive behavior.
Work and energy methods are presented in Section 2.6 to Section 2.11, which includes the topics of virtual work,
strain energy, complementary virtual work, complementary strain energy, and Castigliano’s theorems. Applica
tions of the energy method to trusses is presented in Section 2.12.
ThinWalled Structures 17
Bars Subjected to Axial Loads
placement q 2 at the right end. The distributed force intensity p z ( z ) , forces Q1 and Q2, and the corresponding
displacements q1 and q2, respectively, are defined positive if they act in the positive in the positive zdirection.
See Fig. 2.1. Under the imposed loads, the bar is in tension and/or compression.
y
y
pz ( z )
Q 1, q 1 Q 2, q 2
z, w x
L
Cross section
Fig. 2.1 Axially loaded bar
Equilibrium The internal normal force, or axial force, acting in the zdirection is denoted by function N ( z ) ,
and N is positive if tensile and negative if compressive. See Fig. 2.2. If we consider an interior element of the bar
p z ( z * )dz
Q1 N (ε) N N + dN N (L – ε) Q2
ε→0 z dz
ε ε ε→0
z L
z < z * < z + dz
left end right end
as shown in the center sketch of Fig. 2.2 and a positive normal force is defined to act in the positive zdirection
on a positive zface, then the actionreaction law requires a positive normal force acting on the negative zface to
act in the negative zdirection. A positive zface of this interior element is the face whose normal pointing away
from the material inside the element is in the positive zdirection. Conversely, a negative zface of this interior
element is the face whose normal pointing away from the material inside the element is in the negative zdirec
tion. Force equilibrium in the zdirection of the differential interior element of the bar shown in the figure, in the
limit as dz → 0 , gives the following differential equation of equilibrium.
dN
 + p z ( z ) = 0 0<z<L (2.1)
dz
(In Fig. 2.2 note that coordinate z* where the distributed load intensity is evaluated on the differential element
approaches z in the limit as the element length goes to zero; i.e., z * → z in the limit.)
Let the axial displacement function be denoted by w(z). The function w(z) is the displacement in the zdirec
tion of a particle located at z in the undeformed bar due to the imposed loads as is shown in Fig. 2.3. The axial
18 ThinWalled Structures
The tensile test
displacement of all material points in the cross section is assumed to be the same, but the displacement changes
from cross section to cross section. Hence, the axial displacement is a function of z and not of x and y. The
boundary conditions at z = 0 are
Note that we cannot specify both the displacement and its corresponding force at a point on the body. If we do
not specify the displacement then equilibrium applied separately at the boundaries of the bar (at either z = 0 or z
= L) relates the external force to the internal bar force at the boundary point. See the free body diagrams of the
left and right ends of the bar in Fig. 2.2.
Straindisplacement Extensional deformation of an element of the bar is shown in Fig. 2.3. The axial normal
y
z z + dz z + w(z) z + dz + w + dw
dz dz + dw
z  axis
w + dw
w(z)
( dz + dw ) – dz dw
ε z = Limit  = 
dz dz
dz → 0 (2.4)
The axial normal strain εz is a function of z, and it is dimensionless – it is the change in length divided by the
original length. If the axial displacement function w is a constant value for 0 ≤ z ≤ L, then the bar displaces as a
rigid body and the normal strain is zero, as is evident from eq. (2.4).
To complete the analysis for the response of the bar, we need to relate the internal axial force N to the axial
normal strain εz, and this requires a material law. The material law is obtained from material characterization
tests of carefully designed specimens as discussed in the following section.
may be servohydraulically controlled using a feedback system to maintain specified load magnitude or elonga
tion as a function of time. The loading rate is slow in static testing so that inertia effects are negligible, and usu
ally the load is increased monotonically in time until fracture of the specimen. In addition, servohydraulic load
frames can apply cyclic loading at frequencies of around10Hz, which is used for fatigue testing. Electrical sig
nals from the load cell and strain transducers are conditioned and converted to digital form. The digital response
data can be stored and then plotted using personal computers and laboratory software. The American Society of
Testing Methods (ASTM) publishes standards for testing materials. The standard governing the tensile test of
ductile metals is ASTM E8 – Standard Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials.
The engineering stress σ z in the gage section is defined as the axial force N divided by the original cross
sectional area A of the specimen. The engineering normal strain ε z is defined as the elongation ∆L of the mate
rial in the gage length divided by the original gage length L, and for uniform extension in the gage section it is the
same as the pointwise definition given in eq. (2.4). Typical engineering stressstrain plots for a low carbon steel
and an aluminum alloy are shown in Fig. 2.4. For most engineering materials there is a linear relationship
L N
σ z = 
A
N N
σz L ( 1 + εz ) σz
σu
σu
σ yu
fracture σy fracture
σp σ yl (ε f , σ f ) σp (ε f , σ f )
E
ε 0.2 = 0.002
1
εz εz
0 0
(a) some steels (b) aluminum alloy
Fig. 2.4 Typical stressstrain curves for steel and aluminum alloy from tensile tests
between the axial normal stress σ z and normal strain ε z near the origin of the plot as is shown in the figure. The
slope of the linear portion is a material property called the modulus of elasticity, and is denoted by E. The value
of the stress where the stressstrain plot deviates from a straight line is called the proportional limit, and is
denoted by σ p . The proportional limit is difficult to measure since under test conditions the deviation from a
straight line is subject to some judgement. The deformation of the material in the linear region is usually elastic.
Elastic deformation is defined as the deformation that disappears on removal of the load. The largest stress for
which elastic deformation occurs is called the elastic limit. The elastic limit of a material is also difficult to mea
sure precisely since the specimen must be unloaded and reloaded to determine it. Just after the linear region of
the stressstrain plot for some low carbon steels, there is a relative maximum stress followed by a relative mini
mum, and the deformation, or strain, begins to increase rapidly for small changes in the load. (To observe this
behavior, the elongation or displacement of the specimen is controlled and the load is measured.) The relative
20 ThinWalled Structures
The tensile test
maximum value of the stress is called the upper yield point σ yu , and the stress at the subsequent relative mini
mum value is called the lower yield point σ yl . Values of the upper yield point for metals are sensitive to the load
ing rate and accidental bending stresses. Yielding is associated with plastic deformation of the material. Plastic
deformation is defined as deformation which is independent of time and remains on release of the load. The prin
cipal physical mechanism causing plastic deformation in metals is slippage between planes of atoms in the crys
tal grains of the material (Dowling, 1993).
Loading, unloading, and reloading of a metallic specimen beyond its yield stress is depicted in Fig. 2.5. The
σz
σy ε 0B = ε 0 A + ε AB
ε 0B = total strain
ε 0 A = plastic strain
ε AB = elastic strain
0 εz
A B
Fig. 2.5 Loading and unloading a tensile test specimen beyond the yield stress
unloading slope is nearly the same as the slope of the linear elastic portion, or E. The total strain at load is the
sum of the plastic strain (permanent portion upon removal of the load) and the elastic strain (recoverable por
tion). Since plastic deformation of the material results in a change in size and shape of the structural component,
it is undesirable in design. Hence, yielding of the material is an important phenomena to quantify.
Under service loads, it is required that a structural component not be stressed beyond the yield stress. In
design, the condition of no yielding under service loads is called a limit state.
Aluminum alloys do not exhibit the abrupt yield point of low carbon
σz
steels; i.e., there is no stress just after the linear elastic portion where the σ yield
stressstrain curve has a zero slope. See Fig. 2.4b. Instead, following the lin
ear elastic region, the slope of the stressstrain curve continuously decreases
until a relative maximum engineering stress occurs deep into the response
regime where plastic deformation is dominate. For such material behavior we
E E
define an offset yield stress. A straight line is drawn parallel to the linear elas
1 1
tic portion of the stressstrain curve starting from a strain ε = ε 0.2 = 0.002 εz
on the strain axis. The stress at the intersection of this straight line with the 0 0.002 ε yield
stressstrain curve is defined to be the yield strength σ yield of the material. Fig. 2.6 0.2% offset
Note that the strain of 0.002, or 0.2% (percent strain is defined as 100ε ), is yield strength
plastic strain, since unloading the specimen from the point ( ε yield, σ yield ) on
the stress straincurve would follow the straight dashed line in Fig. 2.6 and the strain of 0.002 would not be
recovered. However, a permanent strain of 0.2% is not considered detrimental for most structural components,
and the 0.2% offset yield strength has the advantage of being a precisely defined quantity. The offset yield stress
is generally the most satisfactory means of defining the yielding event for engineering materials.
ThinWalled Structures 21
Bars Subjected to Axial Loads
After yielding the load may have to increase to cause further plastic defor
mation of the specimen. (Also, the elastic deformation increases.) The increase
N N
in load required for further plastic deformation after yielding is called strain
hardening. The maximum tensile load carried by the specimen occurs during
strain hardening, and this maximum load divided by the original crosssectional
necking deformation
area is called the ultimate tensile strength, or just the tensile strength, of the
material and is denoted by σ u . At the maximum load the deformation of most
metal specimens becomes localized in the form of an abrupt reduction in cross section along a small length in the
gage section. Prior to the maximum load the deformation is spatially uniform in the gage section. Plastic defor
mation becomes concentrated in the reduced cross section after the maximum load. The nonuniform deforma
tion is called necking, and its location in the gage section depends on imperfections in the particular specimen
which are random in nature. The load decreases after necking commences. The tensile test reaches its conclusion
when a small crack develops at the center of the neck and spreads outward to complete the fracture. The engi
neering stress at fracture is denoted by σ f and the engineering strain at fracture is denoted by ε f . Note that the
engineering stress is defined with respect to the original crosssectional area.
In addition to the axial elongation of the bar in the tensile test, most engi
ε x or ε y σ
ε z = z neering materials exhibit a lateral contraction of the cross section. In axial
E compression, the cross section expands. In the linear elastic range of mate
0 rial behavior, the ratio of the lateral normal strain to the axial normal strain
εz
1 is found to be a constant called Poisson’s ratio. Poisson’s ratio is denoted
ν by ν, and it is a dimensionless quantity. See Fig. 2.7. It has the same value
in tension and compression. The x and y axes of the Cartesian system
(x,y,z) lie in the cross section, so the lateral normal strains are denoted by
Fig. 2.7 Lateral normal ε x and ε y . That is, measurements of the diameter of the test specimen in
strains in the tension test
the tensile test reveal that the normal strain in the x and ydirections are
ε x = ε y = – νε z
The negative sign is introduced to make the Poisson’s ratio positive for lateral contraction under uniaxial exten
sion. It is implicit in the above expression that the Poisson’s ratio is the same along the x and ydirections. If a
material is isotropic, then the Poisson’s ratio is necessarily the same in the x and ydirections. An isotropic mate
rial is one for which the material properties are independent of direction. In general, a material in which the prop
erties vary with direction is called anisotropic. Materials whose properties vary from point to point are said to be
heterogeneous, and a material whose properties are uniform from point to point are said to be homogeneous.
For the linear elastic range of material behavior, the material law relating the axial stress σ z to the three nor
mal strains is
ε x = – νσ z ⁄ E ε y = – νσ z ⁄ E εz = σz ⁄ E (uniaxial loading only) (2.5)
22 ThinWalled Structures
Effect of temperature on strain
Typical values of the modulus of elasticity and Poisson’s ratio are listed in the table below for selected metals.
Room temperature modulus of elasticity and Poisson’s ratios for selected metals and metal
alloys (from Callister, 1997)
Modulus of elasticity
Poisson’s ratio,
Material 106 psi GPa dimensionless
Aluminum and aluminum alloys 10 69 0.33
Copper 16 110 0.34
Steels, plain carbon 30 207 0.30
Titanium and titanium alloys 1516.8 104116 0.34
ε zt = α ( T – T 0 ) (2.6)
in which α is called the linear coefficient of thermal expansion. The coefficient of thermal expansion is
0 0
abbreviated as CTE. The dimensional units of α are 1 ⁄ F or 1 ⁄ C , since strain is a dimensionless quantity. Val
ues of the linear coefficient of thermal expansion for selected metals and metal alloys are listed in the table
below. The total strain in the bar is the sum of the strains due to mechanical stress and thermal strain. That is,
σ
ε z = z + α ( T – T 0 )
E
{
ThinWalled Structures 23
Bars Subjected to Axial Loads
0 0
Material 10 –6 ⁄ F 10 –6 ⁄ C
Aluminum 13.1 23.6
Aluminum alloys (cast) 10.013.6 18.024.5
Aluminum alloys (wrought) 10.813.4 19.524.2
Copper 9.4 17.0
Steel (low alloy) 6.27.1 11.112.8
Steel (plain carbon) 6.16.7 11.012.0
Titanium and titanium alloys 4.25.4 7.69.8
y y
y
yc
Mx C
⇔
σ z dA
statically equivalent
N
N x
xc
My
x x
Fig. 2.8 Statical equivalence of the normal stress to the bar resultants.
N =
∫ ∫ σ dA
A
z Mx =
∫ ∫ yσ dA
A
z My =
∫ ∫ xσ dA
A
z (2.8)
24 ThinWalled Structures
Bar reference axis
Substitute the material law for the axial normal stress from eq. (2.7) into these conditions of statical equiva
lence to get
N =
∫ ∫ [E(ε
A
z – α( T – T 0 ) ) ]dA
Mx =
∫ ∫ y[E (ε
A
z – α( T – T 0 ) ) ]dA My =
∫ ∫ x[E (ε
A
z – α( T – T 0 ) ) ]dA
Since the bar is homogenous, the material properties are independent of the crosssectional coordinates. Also, the
extensional strain ε z is independent of the crosssectional coordinates, and the change in temperature is uniform
over the cross section, in pure extensional deformation. Hence, the previous equations become
N = EA [ ε z – α ( T – T 0 ) ]
(2.9)
M x = Q x [ E ( εz – α ( T – T 0 ) ) ] M y = Q y [ E ( εz – α ( T – T 0 ) ) ]
where Q x denotes the first moment of the crosssectional area about the x axis and Q y denotes the first area
moment about the y axis. These first area moments are defined by the integrals
Qx =
∫ ∫ ydA
A
Qy =
∫ ∫ xdA
A
(2.10)
For pure extension of the bar with no bending, the distribution of the axial normal stress must be equivalent to an
axial force and no bending moments. The bending moments can be made to vanish by moving the resultants to a
special point in the cross section. The coordinates ( x c, y c ) of the point in the cross section where the moments
due to a uniform distribution of axial normal strain vanish is called the centroid. Static equivalence yields the
resultants at the centroid as
N = N
M x = M x – yc N = 0 (2.11)
M y = M y – xc N = 0
Solving the last two of eqs. (2.11) for the coordinates of the centroid, and using eqs. (2.9) we get
xc = Q y ⁄ A yc = Q x ⁄ A (2.12)
The location of the centroid depends on distribution of the area of the section about the x  y coordinate system.
The origin of the parallel Cartesian system x, y is at the centroid of the cross section as is shown in Fig. 2.8. The
two coordinate systems are related by
x = xc + x y = yc + y (2.13)
The first area moments have dimensional units of L3. Equations (2.12) establish the location of where the z
axis passes through the cross section. That is, the reference axis of the bar, or the zaxis, passes through the cen
troid of each cross section. If the bar is uniform along its length, then the reference axis is a straight line. Also,
eqs. (2.12) imply the first moments of the crosssectional area about the x and y axis system vanish; i.e.,
Qx =
∫ ∫ ydA = 0
A
Qy =
∫ ∫ xdA = 0
A
ThinWalled Structures 25
Bars Subjected to Axial Loads
From the first of eqs. (2.9) and the first of eqs. (2.11), the material law for the axial force is given by
t
N = EA ( ε z – ε zt ) = EAε z – N (2.14)
where the product the modulus of elasticity and the crosssectional are (EA) is called the axial stiffness , or exten
sinal stiffness, of the bar, and N t denotes the socalled thermal force. The thermal axial force is defined by
t
N = EAε zt = EAα ( T – T 0 ) (2.15)
Note that eq. (2.14) shows that the magnitude of the thermal force is equal to the magnitude of the actual internal
bar force only if the strain vanishes. For example, if the bar is constrained from changing its length
( q 1 = q 2 = 0 ), the distributed load intensity vanishes ( p z ( z ) = 0 ), and there is a change in temperature from
the stress free state, then N = – N t .
Further lets assume the temperature is independent of the axial coordinate z as well as being uniform over
the cross section; i.e., the bar is subjected to a spatially uniform change in temperature. Substitute eq. (2.4) for
the strain in eq. (2.14), and in turn substitute the resulting equation into the equilibrium eq. (2.1) for the axial
force to get
d dw
EA = – pz ( z ) 0<z<L (2.16)
dz dz
where we used d N t ⁄ dz = 0 for a spatially uniform change in temperature. If the axial stiffness EA is indepen
dent of z, that is, the bar is uniform along its length, then eq. (2.16) becomes
2
dw
EA 2 = – p z ( z ) 0<z<L (2.17)
dz
Equation (2.16) is the governing ordinary differential equation for the displacement function w(z), 0 ≤ z ≤ L,
and is of second order. For a second order differential equation we need two boundary conditions to determine
the two constants that arise in the general solution of eq. (2.16). These boundary conditions are given in eqs. (2.2)
and (2.3). Using the material law and the strain displacement equations these boundary conditions become
26 ThinWalled Structures
Linear elastic response
dw
either w ( 0 ) = q 1 or EA  – N t = – Q 1 but not both (2.18)
dz z=0
dw
either w ( L ) = q 2 or EA  – N t = Q 2 but not both (2.19)
dz z=L
EXAMPLE 2.1 Axial bar with a specified uniform distributed load and specified end displacements
q2 – q1 p0 L
c 1 = 
 +  c2 = q1
L 2EA
Substitute these results for the constants of integration in the solution for the axial displacement to get
z z p0
w ( z ) = q 1 1 –  + q 2  –  ( z 2 – Lz ) (2.20)
L L 2EA
The axial strain in the bar is defined by eq. (2.4), and substituting eq. (2.20) for w(z) we get
( q2 – q1 ) p0
 –  ( 2z – L )
ε z =  (2.21)
L 2EA
Finally, substitute the strain given by eq. (2.21) into eq. (2.14) to find the distribution of the axial force as
EA L
N ( z ) =  ( q 2 – q 1 ) – p 0 z –  – N t (2.22)
L 2
ThinWalled Structures 27
Bars Subjected to Axial Loads
where N t = EAα ( T – T 0 ) . Equations (2.20) to (2.22) constitute the complete solution for the linear thermoelas
tic response of the uniform bar subject to a uniform distributed load intensity p0, uniform temperature change
T – T 0 , and end displacement q1 and q2.
We can use eq. (2.22) and the relations N ( 0 ) = – Q 1 and N ( L ) = Q 2 (refer to eqs. (2.2) and (2.3)), to get
EA p0 L t
Q 1 = –  ( q 2 – q 1 ) – 
+N (2.23)
L 2
EA p0 L
 – Nt
Q 2 =  ( q 2 – q 1 ) –  (2.24)
L 2
Addition of these results gives
Q1 + Q2 + p0 L = 0
which is the condition of overall axial force balance for the bar.
EXAMPLE 2.2 A bar with fixed ends and subjected to an axial point force.
F Determine the axial displacement and normal force for the uniform bar
subjected to a point force F as shown in Fig. 2.10. Each end of the bar is
z fixed to a rigid support. There is no change in temperature from the stress
a b free state, and the specified data are, the axial stiffness EA, dimensions a, b,
L and L, and F.
Fig. 2.10 Point force acting on
a clamped bar Solution This is a statically indeterminate problem so all three steps (equi
librium, straindisplacement, and a material law) are needed to solve for the
response of the bar. The governing differential equation (2.17) is valid in
the open intervals 0 < z < a and a < z < L, but is not valid at the location of the point force since a point force is
mathematically equivalent to an infinite value of the distributed load intensity pz acting over a zero length.
Hence, we will need to solve the governing differential equation separately in each open interval. That is
2
dw
EA = 0 0<z<a and a<z<L (2.25)
dz2
Two constants of integration will occur in the solution of this differential equation in each open interval for a total
of four unknown constants. Thus, we need four boundary conditions. Since the ends of the bar are fixed, we have
w(0) = 0 w( L) = 0 (2.26)
w( a– ) = w( a+ ) (2.27)
where a – implies the limit of z → a for values of z < a , and a + implies the limit of z → a for values of z > a .
The last boundary condition comes from axial force equilibrium at the point of application of the force.
dw dw
– N ( a– ) + N ( a+ ) + F = 0 or – EA  + EA  +F = 0 (2.28)
dz z→ a–
dz z → a+
28 ThinWalled Structures
Linear elastic response
where c1, c2, c3, and c4 are constants to be determined from the four boundary conditions. From the two bound
ary conditions given by eqs. (2.26), we find c 2 = 0 and c 4 = – Lc 3 . Using these results in the continuity condi
tion given by eq. (2.27) we get
c1 a = c3 ( a – L )
These last two equations can be solved for the constants c1 and c3, and the solution is c 1 = ( bF ) ⁄ ( EAL )
c 3 = – ( aF ) ⁄ ( EAL ) , where we used b = L  a. Hence the displacement function is
bF
 z 0≤z≤a
EAL
w(z) = (2.29)
aF

(L – z) a≤z≤L
EAL
b F 0≤z≤a
L
N (z) = (2.30)
– a F a≤z≤L
L
The displacement and normal force are plotted with respect to the axial coordinate in Fig. 2.11. Note that the dis
w
abF

EAL
z
0
a L
N Fig. 2.11 Displacement and normal force
b distributions for the clamped bar
 F subjected to a point force.
L
z
0 a L
a
–  F
L
placement is continuous in z, and that the normal force has a jump discontinuity at z = a. The value of the discon
ThinWalled Structures 29
Bars Subjected to Axial Loads
a b
tinuity in the normal force is N ( a + ) – N ( a – ) = –  F –  F = – F , which satisfies the first of eqs. (2.28).
L L
Hence, to define incremental work in continuum structures we need to account for small variations in the
displacement variables which are themselves continuous functions of the coordinates. In the mathematical sense,
a bar is called a onedimensional structure, since the dependent variables describing the displacement, strain, and
the internal normal force are functions of a single independent variable z, 0 ≤ z ≤ L, where L is the length of the
bar. The coordinate z locates a material point in the undeformed bar.
A displacement function is said to be kinematically admissible if it satisfies continuity conditions and speci
fied boundary conditions on the displacement, if any. A kinematically admissible function may not satisfy the
governing boundary value problem for the response of the bar. However, within the set of all kinematically
admissible displacement functions one will satisfy the governing differential equation of equilibrium, eq. (2.16),
and the specified boundary conditions on the axial force, if any, which are given in eqs. (2.2) and (2.3). That is,
the exact displacement function of the equilibrium state is in the set of kinematically admissible displacement
functions.
The virtual displacement function is a new infinitesimal function, and to emphasize this fact it is also repre
sented as
30 ThinWalled Structures
Work and energy methods
δw ( z ) = εη ( z ) (2.31)
where ε is an infinitesimal scalar parameter and the function η ( z ) is an arbitrary, but kinematically admissible,
function. The varied displacement function is defined as
w̃ ( z ) = w ( z ) + εη ( z ) (2.32)
Although the virtual displacement δw ( z ) is a new displacement function, the use of the prefix greek letter δ
is meant to convey a change in the function w ( z ) in analogy to the use of letter “d” used in calculus. However,
the greek letter "δ" means an infinitesimal change in the displacement for a fixed value of z, where the symbol
"d" in calculus means the change in a function with respect to a change in its independent variable. The differ
ence between the variation of a function and the differential of a function is depicted in Fig. 2.13. Since in the
w̃ ( z )
w(z)
δw ( z )
q 1 + δq 1
dw
dz q 2 + δq 2
q2
q1
0 z z + dz L
z
ordinary calculus the differential of the function w(z) is dw = w ( z + dz ) – w ( z ) , the physical interpretation of
dw is the difference in the displacements of two particles, one particle originally at z + dz and the second one
ThinWalled Structures 31
Bars Subjected to Axial Loads
originally at z in the undeformed body. The physical interpretation of the infinitesimal function δw(z) is change in
the displacement of a single particle originally a z in the undeformed body. The "δ" is considered an operator in a
sense similar to the differential operator "d" in calculus. The "δ" operator means the variation in a function and
not the differential of a function with respect to a change in its independent variable. The distinction between the
variation of a function and the differential of a function is essential in formulating the concept of work in a con
tinuous system of particles, and the mathematics dealing with the variation of functions is called the calculus of
variations. That is, the calculus of variations is a mathematical tool by which work and energy methods are
applied to systems with infinitely many degrees of freedom. A more complete description of the calculus of vari
ations applied to structural problems is presented in the text by Langhaar (1962), and Courant and Hilbert (1953)
present the essential mathematical framework. However, the reader may be interested in the recent text book by
Dym (1997) which presents energy methods for continnum models with limited use of the calculus of variations.
We will encounter the variation of the derivative of a function and the variation of the definite integral of a
function in the discussions that follow. These are defined as (refer to Fig. 2.13)
L L L
dw dw̃ dw
δ  ≡  – 
dz dz dz ∫ ∫
δ w dz ≡ w̃ dz – w dz
∫ (2.33)
0 0 0
Substitute the for the total displacement w̃ ( z ) the relation w̃ ( z ) = w ( z ) + δw ( z ) into these definitions to get
L L
dw d
δ  =  ( δw )
dz dz ∫
δ w dz =
∫ δw dz (2.34)
0 0
These relations show that the variational operator and the derivative, and the variational operator and the integral
are interchangeable.
∫
δW ext = Q 1 δq 1 + Q 2 δq 2 + p z ( z )δw ( z ) dz (2.35)
0
Since it is assumed that the bar is in an equilibrium state prior to the application of the virtual displacements, we
have from the boundary conditions on the axial force, see eqs. (2.2) and (2.3), that
L
d
Q 1 δq 1 + Q 2 δq 2 = – N ( 0 )δw ( 0 ) + N ( L )δw ( L ) =
∫ 0 z
d
( Nδw ) dz
Differentiating the first term in the integral on the right hand side of this equation, and using the interchange of
32 ThinWalled Structures
Work and energy methods
the derivative and variation, as shown by the first of eqs. (2.34), we get
L
dN + p δw + Nδ dw dz
δW ext =
∫ dz z dz
0
The first term in the integral on the righthand side of this equation vanishes via the equilibrium condition given
in eq. (2.1), and the second term contains the variation in the strain as defined in eq. (2.4) Hence,
L
δW ext =
∫ Nδε dz
z (2.36)
0
Since the integral on the righthand side of this equation is determined by the internal bar force and the incremen
tal strain, it is defined as the internal virtual work δW int . The internal virtual work is defined as
∫
δW int ≡ Nδε z dz (2.37)
0
What the manipulations from eq. (2.35) to (2.37) show is that for a bar in equilibrium, the external virtual work is
equal to the internal virtual work for a kinematically admissible variation in the displacement function w ( z ) .
This proves the necessary condition that if the body is in equilibrium then the external virtual work equals the
internal virtual work for a kinematically admissible variation in the displacement. In problem solving we assume
that equating the external to the internal virtual work for every kinematically admissible displacement is suffi
cient for equilibrium of the body. We state this principle as follows.
For the axially loaded bar, the principle of virtual work states that the bar is in equilibrium if
δW ext = δW int for every kinematically admissible δw ( z ) (2.38)
where the external virtual work is given by eq. (2.35) and the internal virtual work is given by eq. (2.37). The
principle of virtual work is an integral form of the equations of equilibrium for the bar. The mathematical condi
tions of kinematic admissibility of the virtual displacement function δw(z) are that it is continuous, its first deriv
ative is piecewise continuous, and that it vanishes at points where the displacement w(z) is prescribed. That is, the
virtual displacement, or variation in the displacement, must be a possible displacement of the bar.
If no restrictions are placed on the virtual displacement function δw(z) other than kinematic admissibility,
then the PVW leads to the exact differential equation of equilibrium for the bar, eq. (2.1), and the associated
boundary conditions, eqs. (2.2) and (2.3). Moreover, it will be shown in Example 2.5 that the PVW for a linear
elastic bar gives the exact solution if the assumed displacement function has the flexibility to represent the exact
displacement. Hence, it may seem that the PVW yields nothing new. However, in complex structures, an exact,
closed form, mathematical solution is rarely known. We must resort to approximate solutions, and the PVW is a
powerful technique to develop approximate solutions based on assumed displacement functions containing
unknown parameters. In fact, the PVW is the basis of many finite element procedures used in structural mechan
ics. The use of the PVW to obtain an approximate solution is illustrated in the following example.
ThinWalled Structures 33
Bars Subjected to Axial Loads
Consider the bar of Example 2.2 again, and take length a equal to b so that a = b = L/2; that is, the point force F
z
acts at the center of the bar. Assume the axial displacement of the bar of the form w ( z ) = q 1 sin π  , in which
L
the unknown parameter q1 represents the axial displacement at z = L/2.
a) Show that the assumed displacement function is kinematically admissible.
b) Use the principle of virtual work to determine the equilibrium equation associated with the assumed dis
placement function.
c) Assume the material is linear elastic and solve for the unknown parameter q1.
d) Calculate the percentage error in the maximum displacement and maximum stress with respect to the
exact solution.
Solution (a) To be kinematically admissible the displacement function must be continuous in the interval 0 ≤ z ≤
L, and satisfy prescribed boundary conditions. The sine function is continuous in the interval, and its derivative
with respect to z, or the strain, is also continuous. The prescribed boundary conditions on the axial displacement
are w(0) = 0 and w(L) = 0. Since the function sin ( πz ⁄ L ) is zero at z = 0 and z = L, the prescribed displacement
boundary conditions are satisfied. Thus, the assumed displacement is kinematically admissible.
(b) The variation in the assumed displacement, or virtual displacement, is δw ( z ) = δq 1 sin ( πz ⁄ L ) , where
δq1 is the variation in the unknown parameter q1. The only external force acting on the bar that performs work is
the point force F, so the external virtual work is
δW ext = Fδw ( L ⁄ 2 ) = Fδq 1
The internal virtual work is given by eq. (2.37), which requires the virtual strain. The virtual strain is merely the
d π z
derivative with respect to z of the virtual displacement function; i.e., δε z =  ( δw ) = δq 1  cos π  . Hence
dz L L
the internal virtual work is
L L
π z
Nδε z dz = δq 1  N cos π  dz
δW int =
∫ L ∫ L
0 0
Now equate the external virtual work to the internal virtual work, and rearrange the result to get
L
π z
 N cos π  dz – F δq 1 = 0
L ∫ L
∀δq 1
0
Note that at this point we cannot carry out the integration in this last equation since we do not know how the axial
force depends on the displacement. The relationship that is missing is the material law; i.e., the PVW gives the
34 ThinWalled Structures
Work and energy methods
equilibrium condition related to the kinematically admissible displacement independent of the material law.
(c) For a linear elastic material and no change in temperature from the stress free state, the material law is
N = EAε z and the straindisplacement relation is ε z = dw ⁄ dz . Substitute the approximate displacement into
the straindisplacement relation, and then substitute this result into the material law to get
π z
N = EAq 1  cos π 
L L
Substitute this expression for the axial force into the equilibrium condition, eq. (2.39), and rearrange it to get
L
2
π z
EAq 1 
L ∫ cos π L dz = F
2
π2 2 FL
EAq 1  = F solving for q 1 q 1 = 2 
2L π EA
We have determined the unknown parameter q1 in the assumed displacement function terms of the applied force,
length of the bar, and the extensional stiffness of the bar. Finally, the displacement approximation is
2 FL z
w ( z ) = 2  sin π  0≤z≤L (2.40)
π EA L
2 z
N =  F cos π  (2.41)
π L
(d) For a = b = L/2, the maximum displacement of the exact solution, eq. (2.29), occurs at the center of the
bar and is w exact = ( FL ) ⁄ ( 4EA ) . The maximum displacement in the approximate solution, eq. (2.40), also
occurs at the center of the bar and is w approx = ( 2FL ) ⁄ ( π 2 EA ) . The percentage error in the approximate solu
tion is given by
w exact – w approx 1 ⁄ 4 – ( 2 ⁄ π2 )
 × 100 =  × 100 = 18.9%
w exact 1⁄4
So the approximate displacement at the center of the bar is 18.9% less than the exact value. The fact that the
approximate displacement is less than the exact displacement means our assumed displacement function is too
restrictive and results in a stiffer response than what the exact solution gives.
ThinWalled Structures 35
Bars Subjected to Axial Loads
The maximum value of the normal force in the exact solution, eq. (2.30), occurs in the left half of the bar and
is N exact = F ⁄ 2 . The maximum value of the normal force in the approximate solution, eq. (2.41), occurs at z =
0 and is N approx = ( 2F ) ⁄ π . The percentage error in the approximate solution for the normal force is
The maximum normal force in the approximate solution exceeds the exact value by 27.3%.
z z
w ( z ) = q 1 sin π  + q 3 sin 3π  0≤z≤L (2.42)
L L
in which parameters q1 and q3 are unknown and are independent. Note that this approximate displacement func
tion is continuous and satisfies the prescribed displacement boundary conditions w(0) = 0 and w(L) = 0; that is,
eq. (2.42) is a kinematically admissible displacement function for the bar with fixed ends. In fact, each of the
individual sine functions in this equation are kinematically admissible, so there sum is kinematically admissible.
Also note that axial displacement at the center of the bar is w(L/2) = q1  q3, and the axial displacements at w(L/
3) = w(2L/3) = q1. We are approximating the axial displacement by the superposition of two sine functions of dif
ferent frequencies as is depicted in Fig. 2.14. The principle of virtual work will lead to two equilibrium condi
tions: one condition determined by the independent virtual displacement δq1 and the second condition
determined from the independent virtual displacement δq3. Explicit determination of these equilibrium condi
tions is one of the problems in Section 2.13.
1
0.75
z
0.5 sin π 
0.25 L
zêL
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
0.25
0.5
0.75
Fig. 2.14 Sine functions of a two term 1
approximation to the axial
displacement z
sin 3π 
1 L
0.5
zêL
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
0.5
1
36 ThinWalled Structures
Work and energy methods
dw
δU 0 = Nδε z = Nδ  (2.43)
dz
For a linear elastic material, we can eliminate the axial force in this equation using the material law in eq. (2.14)
to get
dw dw
δU 0 = EA  – ε zt δ  (2.44)
dz dz
where we used eq. (2.4) to eliminate the strain in terms of the displacement derivative. The form of this incre
mental quantity suggests there is a function of the derivative of the displacement, or strain, such that its variation
is given by eq. (2.44). If such a function exists, it is actually a function of a function (the displacement deriva
tive), and it is denoted by U 0 [ w′ ( z ) ] , where the prime means ordinary derivative; i.e., w′ = dw ⁄ dz . Functions
that depend on a functions are called functionals. But what is meant by the variation of the functional
U 0 [ w′ ( z ) ] ? To answer this question we consider evaluating the functional for the varied function w̃ ( z ) . Since
the varied function contains the scalar parameter ε , and w̃ ( z ) → w ( z ) as ε → 0 (refer to eq. (2.32)), the change
in U 0 with respect to the function w ( z ) can be examined by considering U 0 [ w̃ ( z ) ] as an ordinary function of
the parameter ε . Thus, the variation of the functional is defined as
U 0 [ w′ + εη′ ] – U o [ w′ ] d
δU 0 ≡ lim  ε = d ε U 0 [ w̃′ ] ε (2.45)
ε → 0 ε ε = 0
Regard the quantity w̃′ as a simple variable in the functional U 0 , and by using the chain rule for differentiation,
we write the previous equation as
∂U 0 ∂ ∂U 0
δU 0 = ( w̃′ ) ε = η′ε
∂ w̃′ ∂ ε ε=0
∂ w′
since w̃′ → w′ as ε → 0 , and where ∂w̃′ ⁄ ∂ε = η′ . But eq. (2.31) gives δw′ = εη′ . So the variation of func
tional U 0 is
∂U 0
δU 0 = δw′ (2.46)
∂ w′
Equate this definition to eq. (2.44) and we have
∂U 0
δU 0 = δw′ = EA [ w′ – ε zt ]δw′
∂ w′
∂U 0
= EA ( w′ – ε zt )
∂ w′
Integrate this relation this relation with respect to w′ , treating w′ as a simple variable as in the ordinary calculus,
to find
1
U 0 [ w′ ( z ) ] =  EA ( w′ ) 2 – EAε zt w′ (2.47)
2
ThinWalled Structures 37
Bars Subjected to Axial Loads
in which the constant of integration is zero since U 0 is taken be zero if the strain is zero. We have also assumed
in this integration that the thermal strain is independent of the strain. The functional U 0 [ w′ ( z ) ] or U 0 [ ε z ] , given
by eq. (2.47) is called the strain energy density. The dimensional units of the strain energy density in this case are
(FL)/L. Notice that the partial derivative of the strain energy density with respect to the strain gives the axial
force; i.e.,
∂U 0
N = = EA ( ε z – ε zt ) (2.48)
∂ εz
The fact that N = ∂U 0 ⁄ ∂ε z is an important property of the strain energy density. In fact, an elastic material can
be defined as one for which a strain energy density function exists.
Return to the internal virtual work expression given in eq. (2.37) and identify the integrand on the righthand
side as the variation in the strain energy density as given in eq. (2.47). We write the internal virtual work as
L
δW int =
∫ δU dz = δU
0 (2.49)
0
where we interchanged the variational operator and the integral per the second of eqs. (2.34), and then defined
the strain energy as
L L
1
∫ U dz = ∫ EA 2 ε – ε z ε z dz
2 t
U = 0 z (2.50)
0 0
The strain energy represents the energy stored in the bar due to elastic deformation. It has the dimensional units
of FL. Note that the temperature, which is contained in the thermal strain, enters the strain energy as a parame
ter.
EXAMPLE 2.4 Strain energy of a bar with fixed ends and subjected to an axial point force.
Consider the bar with fixed ends subjected to the axial point force as discussed in Example 2.2 on page 28 .
(a) Determine the strain energy in the bar.
(b) Determine the strain energy in the approximate solution of the bar given in Example 2.3.
(c) Determine the percentage error in the approximate strain energy with respect to its exact value.
Solution (a) The displacement function of the exact solution is given by eq. (2.29). Differentiating this expres
sion with respect to z determines the strain, and this strain is
bF
 0≤z≤a
EAL
εz =
aF
– 
 a≤z≤L
EAL
Substitute this result into the expression for the strain energy given by eq. (2.50), and note that in this example
the thermal strain vanishes, to find
38 ThinWalled Structures
Work and energy methods
a L
1 bF 2 1 aF 2
U =  EA  dz +  EA –  dz
2 ∫ EAL 2 EAL∫
0 a
Since the bar is uniform, the extensional stiffness EA is uniform in z. So, after integration, the strain energy
becomes
ab 2 F 2 a 2 bF 2 abF 2
U = 2 + 2 = 
2EAL 2EAL 2EAL
where we used the fact that b = L – a . For the case of a = b = L/2, the strain energy in the exact solution
reduces to
LF 2
U =  (a = b = L ⁄ 2)
8EA
(b) The approximate solution for the displacement is given by eq. (2.40), which is repeated below.
2 FL z
w ( z ) = 2  sin π  0≤z≤L
π EA L
Differentiating this expression to find the strain we get
2 F z
ε z =   cos π  0≤z≤L
π EA L
Substitute this result into the expression for the strain energy given by eq. (2.50), and again note there is no ther
mal strain, to find
L
2
1 2 F z
U =  EA   cos π 
2 ∫
π EA L
dz
0
LF 2
(c) The exact strain energy is determined in part (a) as U exact =  , and the strain energy in the approxi
8EA
1 F2L
mate solution is determined in part (b) as U approx = 2  . The percentage error in the approximate solution
π EA
with respect to the exact solution is given by
U exact – U approx 1 ⁄ 8 – 1 ⁄ π2
 × 100 =  × 100 = 18.9%
U exact 1⁄8
The next example illustrates that the PVW as applied to a linear elastic bar gives the exact solution, if the
assumed displacement function can represent the exact displacement. Of course, in solving for the response of
more complex structures the exact form of the displacement function is not known. It is reassuring, however, that
ThinWalled Structures 39
Bars Subjected to Axial Loads
if the exact displacement is substituted into the PVW, the exact equilibrium equations are obtained from the prin
ciple.
EXAMPLE 2.5 An elastic bar subjected to two forces and a thermal load
Show that virtual work eq. (2.38) leads to equilibrium equations for the displacements of the linear elastic bar of
Example 2.1 on page 27. For simplicity, take the distributed load p z ( z ) = 0 for all z. The bar is subjected to
specified end forces Q 1 and Q 2 , and a spatially uniform temperature change ( T – T 0 ) . The end displacements
q 1 and q 2 are unknown, since the end forces are prescribed. Take the kinematically admissible displacement to
be
z z
w ( z ) = q 1 1 –  + q 2  (2.51)
L L
Parameters q1 and q2 are unknown and independent. Parameters q1 and q2 physically represent the end displac
ments of the bar since w ( 0 ) = q 1 and w ( L ) = q 2 .
Solution Since end displacements are not known the variation in the displacement function, or virtual displace
ment, is
z z
δw ( z ) = δq 1 1 –  + δq 2 
L L
δW int =
∫ δU dz 0
0
∂U 0
δU 0 = δw′ = EA ( w′ – ε zt )δw′
∂ w′
Obtain the derivative of the displacement from eq. (2.51) and substitute it, and eq. (2.52) for the variation of the
derivative, into the previous equation to get
( q2 – q1 ) ( δq 2 – δq 1 )
 – ε zt 
δU 0 = EA 
L L
Substitute this variation of the strain energy density into the internal virtual work to get
40 ThinWalled Structures
Castigliano’s first theorem
( q2 – q1 )
 – ε zt ( δq 2 – δq 1 )
δW int = EA 
L
The external virtual work for no distributed loading, see eq. (2.35), becomes
δW ext = Q 1 δq 1 + Q 2 δq 2
EA t EA t
Q 1 +  ( q 2 – q 1 ) – N δq 1 + Q 2 –  ( q 2 – q 1 ) + N δq 2 = 0 ∀δq 1 and δq 2 (2.53)
L L
where the thermal force N t = EAε zt . Since the virtual displacements are independent, we can take δq 1 ≠ 0 and
δq 2 = 0 , so that eq. (2.53) leads to
EA t
Q 1 +  ( q 2 – q 1 ) – N δq 1 = 0 ∀δq 1 ≠ 0
L
which in turn gives
EA t
Q 1 = –  ( q 2 – q 1 ) + N (2.54)
L
Now take δq 1 = 0 and δq 2 ≠ 0 and then eq. (2.53) leads to
EA t
Q 2 –  ( q 2 – q 1 ) + N δq 2 = 0 ∀δq 2 ≠ 0
L
which in turn gives
EA t
Q 2 =  ( q 2 – q 1 ) – N (2.55)
L
Equations (2.54) and (2.55) agree with the exact result as derived in Section 2.5 and specified by eqs. (2.23) and
(2.24) if the distributed load intensity p 0 is set to zero. We get the exact result because the given displacement
function, eq. (2.51), is the exact displacement for this case, as can be verified from eq. (2.20).
ThinWalled Structures 41
Bars Subjected to Axial Loads
ential equation (2.16) subject to boundary conditions (2.2) and (2.3). But the procedure followed in this example
can be extended to structures builtup of bars subjected to end forces and a uniform temperature change from the
stress free state, since the displacement of each bar is of the form of eq. (2.51). These observations motivate Cas
tigliano’s first theorem.
The virtual work eq. (2.38) is extended to an elastic structural system subjected to many external point forces
Q n , n = 1, 2, …, N , but no distributed loads. The displacements at the points of application of the forces, in the
direction of the forces, are denoted q n , n = 1, 2, …, N , and are assumed to be independent. Forces Q n and dis
placements q n are said to be corresponding forces and displacements, since they are defined to act at the same
point on the body’s surface and in the same direction. We consider the external point forces as specified, and the
corresponding displacements as unknown. The virtual work eq. (2.38) becomes
N
∑ Q δq n n = δU (2.56)
n=1
In principle, it is possible to write the displacement functions for the structural system such that the independent
q n ‘s appear as parameters in the functions. Then the strains in terms of the q n ‘s are determined from the strain
displacement equations similar to eq. (2.4). Finally, the strains are substituted into the strain energy of the system
and integration over the volume of the system is carried out explicitly. Hence, the strain energy of the structural
system becomes a function of the q n ‘s; i.e.,
U = U ( q 1, q 2, …, q N )
Since the virtual displacements are independent, we conclude from eq. (2.58) that
∂U
Q n =  n = 1, 2, …, N (2.59)
∂q n
This is the equation of Castigliano’s first theorem, which is also called Castigliano’s theorem part I. Note the sim
ilarity of eq. (2.59) to the property of the strain energy density that the internal bar force is equal to the derivative
of the strain energy density with respect to the strain; or, N = ∂U 0 ⁄ ∂ε z . This theorem is stated for the general
case as follows.
42 ThinWalled Structures
Castigliano’s first theorem
∂U
Q n =  n = 1, 2, …, N
∂q n
To illustrate the application of Castigliano’s first theorem consider the twoforce member in Example 2.5 on
page 40 again. Substitute the displacement function given in eq. (2.51) into the straindisplacement relation of eq.
(2.4) to determine the strain as
( q2 – q1 )
ε z = 

L
Substitute this expression for the strain into the strain energy given by eq. (2.50) to get
L
1 q2 – q1 2 q2 – q1
EA   – ε zt  dz
U =
∫ 2 L L
0
where the thermal force is defined as N t = EAε zt . From eq. (2.59) we find
∂U EA t
Q1 = =  ( q 2 – q 1 ) ( – 1 ) + N
∂ q1 L
∂U EA t
Q2 = =  ( q 2 – q 1 ) – N
∂ q2 L
which coincide with the exact solution given in Example 2.1 on page 27 in eqs. (2.23) and (2.24) when the dis
tributed load intensity set to zero.
Determine the relationship for between the external forces and the corresponding displacements for equilibrium
of the axially loaded bar containing a step change in cross section as shown below. There is no change in temper
ature from the stressfree state. Use Castigliano’s first theorem.
ThinWalled Structures 43
Bars Subjected to Axial Loads
( EA ) 1 ( EA ) 2
q 1, Q 1
z, w q 2, Q 2
L1 L2
Solution The deformation of the bar is a state of uniform strain in each section. Using the displacement function
corresponding to uniform strain given by eq. (2.51) in Example 2.5 on page 40 as a guide, we write the axial dis
placement functions for each section of the bar as
z
w ( z ) = q 1  0 ≤ z ≤ L1
L1
z – L1 z – L1
w ( z ) = q 1 1 –  + q 2  L1 ≤ z ≤ L1 + L2
L2 L2
Note that these displacement functions are continuous, w(0) = 0, w(L1) = q1 for both functions, and w(L1 + L2) =
q2. From the straindisplacement relation, eq. (2.4), these displacements yield the strains in each section as
q q2 – q1
( ε z ) 1 = 1 ( ε z ) 2 = 

L1 L2
The displacement is continuous at z = L1, but the strain is discontinuous at z = L 1 unless the external forces are
applied in such a manner that ( L 1 + L 2 )q 1 – L 2 q 2 = 0 . The strain energy is the sum of the strain energies in
each section as determined from eq. (2.50) with the thermal strain set equal to zero; i.e.,
L1 ( L1 + L2 )
1 1
U =  ( EA ) 1 ( ε z ) 12 dz +  ( EA ) 2 ( ε z ) 22 dz
2 ∫ 2 ∫
0 L1
1 EA 1 EA
U =   q 12 +   ( q 2 – q 1 ) 2
2 L 1 2 L 2
Castigliano’s theorem gives
∂U EA EA
Q1 = =  q 1 +  ( q 2 – q 1 ) ( – 1 )
∂ q1 L 1 L 2
∂U EA
Q2 = = 0 +  ( q 2 – q 1 )
∂ q2 L 2
44 ThinWalled Structures
Trusses
Q1 k 1 + k 2 –k 2 q1 EA EA
= where k 1 =  k 2 = 
Q2 –k 2 k2 q2 L 1 L 2
The 2 x 2 matrix
( k 1 + k 2 ) –k 2
(2.60)
–k 2 k2
is called the stiffness matrix of the structure. Note that the stiffness matrix is symmetric. A symmetric stiffness
matrix results for any linear elastic structural system undergoing small displacements.
2.8 Trusses
Trusses are idealized as an assemblage of twoforce members connected by smooth ballandsocket joints in
threedimensional trusses, or by smooth hinge joints in a planar truss. External forces are assumed to act only at
the joints. The line connecting the joints at the end of the bar is assumed to coincide with the reference axis of the
bar. Hence, the axial force and strain in each bar is uniform along its length, and the bar is either in tension or
compression. A planar truss consisting of fifteen bars and eight joints is shown in Fig. 2.16. Each joint in a pla
4 8 12 16
2 4 6 8 3 7 11 15
2 6 10 14
1 3 5 7 1 5 9 13
joint numbering degree of freedom numbering
nar truss has two degrees of freedom, one horizontal and the other vertical. Hence, there are sixteen degrees of
freedom for this truss. At joint i, which is often called node i, i = 1, 2,..., 8, the horizontal displacement is denoted
by q 2i – 1 and the vertical displacement is denoted by q 2i . The positive directions for the displacements and cor
responding forces in the fifteen bar truss are defined as shown in Fig. 2.16. The original coordinates of the joints
and the sixteen displacements completely define the configuration of the truss in the deformed state. Cas
tigliano’s first theorem is particularly useful in the analysis of the static structural response of trusses. The dis
placements q n and the corresponding forces Q n , n = 1, 2, …, 16 , used in the formulation of Castigliano’s
theorem are the displacements and forces at the joints, or nodes.
To use Castigliano’s first theorem, we need the strain energy of the truss in terms of the nodal displacements.
Begin with a generic bar, say, the ith bar whose original length is L i and elongation in the deformed state is ∆ i .
Since the strain is uniform along the bar the axial strain of the ith bar is
ThinWalled Structures 45
Bars Subjected to Axial Loads
∆
ε i = i (2.61)
Li
The bar may also be subjected to a uniform temperature change from the stress free state, and the thermal strain
due to temperature for the ith bar is denoted as ε it . From eq. (2.50) the strain energy in the ith bar is
Li
1 2
 ε i – ε it ε i dz
Ui =
∫ ( EA ) i
2
(2.62)
0
The integrand in this equation is independent of the zcoordinate along the reference axis of the bar, and the
result of the integration is simply the length of the bar times the integrand. Substitute eq. (2.61) for the strain, and
denote the thermal force in the ith bar as N it = ( EA ) i ε it , so that the strain energy becomes
1 EA
U i =   ∆ i2 – N it ∆ i (2.63)
2 L i
The strain energy of the assemblage is simply the sum of the strain energies in each bar; i.e.,
1 EA 2
U = ∑
all bars
  ∆ i – N it ∆ i
2 L i
(2.64)
We have assumed the temperature change is spatially uniform in each bar, but it can be different from bar to bar.
The elongation of a truss bar depends on the nodal displacements at its end points. Hence, Castigliano’s first the
orem for the truss shown in Fig. 2.16 gives
15
EA
 ∂∆ i
Qn = ∑  ∆ – N it
L i i
∂ q n
n = 1, 2, …, 16 (2.65)
i=1
Since the directions of the nodal displacements at the end of a typical bar do not coincide with the reference
axis of the bar, it is necessary to express the elongation of the bar in terms of the nodal displacements in order to
use Castigliano’s theorem.
Geometry of deformation To relate the elongation of a typical bar to its nodal displacements, requires a study
of the geometry of the deformation of the bar. The end nodes, or joints, of the bar in the undeformed state are
labeled by integers i and j as shown in Fig. 2.17. In the xy plane of the truss, the coordinates of the beginning
node i are ( x i, y i ) , and the coordinates of the end node j are ( x j, y j ) . The square of the length of the undeformed
bar is determined by the pythagorean theorem as
L 2 = ( x j – xi ) 2 + ( y j – yi ) 2 (2.66)
As is depicted in Fig. 2.17, the bar displaces and rotates to a new position in the plane. The coordinates of
the beginning node in the deformed state are ( x i + q 2i – 1, y i + q 2i ) , and the coordinates of the end node in the
deformed state are ( x j + q 2 j – 1, y j + q 2 j ) . The counterclockwise rotation of the bar is denoted by the angle Ω .
46 ThinWalled Structures
Trusses
j*
y
L*
q2 j
i* α+Ω
j
yj
q2 j – 1
L q 2i
i α
yi
q 2i – 1
0 xi xj x
Let L * denote the length of the bar in the deformed state. The square of the length of the bar in the deformed
configuration is
( L * ) 2 = [ ( x j + q 2 j – 1 ) – ( x i + q 2i – 1 ) ] 2 + [ ( y j + q 2 j ) – ( y i + q 2i ) ] 2 (2.68)
and the direction cosines of the bar in the deformed configuration are
( x j + q 2 j – 1 ) – ( x i + q 2i – 1 )
cos ( α + Ω ) = 
 (2.69)
L*
( y j + q 2 j ) – ( y i + q 2i )
sin ( α + Ω ) = 
 (2.70)
L*
Define the relative elongation of the bar in the xdirection as
( q 2 j – 1 – q 2i – 1 )
ε x ≡  (2.71)
L
and the relative elongation of the bar in the ydirection as
( q 2 j – q 2i )
ε y = 
 (2.72)
L
Rearranging eq. (2.68) and using the above definitions we get
The lefthand sides of eqs. (2.69) and (2.70) are expanded by the trigonometric identity for the sum of angles,
and the definitions given by eqs. (2.71) and (2.72) are used in the righthand sides of eqs. (2.69) and (2.70) to get
L
cos α cos Ω – sin α sin Ω =  ( cos α + ε x ) (2.74)
L*
L
sin α cos Ω + cos α sin Ω = * ( sin α + ε y ) (2.75)
L
ThinWalled Structures 47
Bars Subjected to Axial Loads
If ∆ denotes the elongation of the bar, then L * = L + ∆ . The latter expression can be written as
L * = L ( 1 + ε ) where the strain of the bar is denoted by ε = ∆ ⁄ L . Expand the righthand side of eq. (2.73), use
the trigonometric identity cos2 α + sin2 α = 1 , and let L * = L ( 1 + ε ) to get
Expand the lefthand side of this result, subtract one from each side, and the divide each side by two to get
1 1
ε 1 +  ε = ( cos α )ε x + ( sin α )ε y +  ( ε x2 + ε y2 ) (2.77)
2 2
To find the sine of the rotation angle, multiply eq. (2.74) by – sin α , multiply eq. (2.75) cos α , and then add the
resulting equations. We obtain
1
sin Ω =  [ ( cos α )ε y – ( sin α )ε x ] (2.78)
(1 + ε)
Given the relative xdirection displacements and the relative ydirection displacements of the nodes, the strain of
the bar is determined from eq. (2.77) and the rotation of the bar is determined by eq. (2.78). For most trusses, the
strains and rotation of the bars are very small. For infinitesimal deformations, the following quantities are very
small
0≤ ε «1 0 ≤ εx « 1 0 ≤ εy « 1
Hence, eq. (2.77) yields the following approximation for the bar strain
ε ≈ ( cos α )ε x + ( sin α )ε y (2.79)
and eq. (2.78) yields the following approximation for the rotation
Ω ≈ ( cos α )ε y – ( sin α )ε x (2.80)
Substitute eqs. (2.71) and (2.72) for the relative elongations into eq. (2.79) to get
∆ q 2 j – 1 – q 2i – 1 q 2 j – q 2i
 ≈ cos α  + sin α 
L L L
The planar truss shown in Fig. 2.19 consists of three bars and one movable joint. Take the thermal strains to be
zero. Determine the 2 x 2 stiffness matrix using Castigliano’s first theorem.
48 ThinWalled Structures
Trusses
q 2, Q 2
q 1, Q 1
EA
 EA
 EA

  
L 1 L 2 L 3
α1 α2 α3
Equation (2.65) results from the application of Castigliano’s theorem, and applied to this example gives
3
EA
Q1 = ∑ L [ cos ( α ) q
i
i 1 + sin ( α i ) q 2 ] [ cos ( α i ) ]
i=1
3
EA
Q2 = ∑ L [ cos ( α ) q
i
i 1 + sin ( α i ) q 2 ] [ sin ( α i ) ]
i=1
Q1 k 11 k 12 q 1
= (2.83)
Q2 k 21 k 22 q 2
Note that this example is statically indeterminate, since we have only two equilibrium equations at the movable
joint for three unknown bar forces. Given the applied forces Q 1 and Q 2 , matrix eq. (2.83) is solved for the nodal
displacements q 1 and q 2 . From eq. (2.82) the elongation of each bar is then computed, and from these elonga
tions the bar forces are determined from
EA
N i =  ∆ i i = 1, 2, 3 (2.85)
L i
ThinWalled Structures 49
Bars Subjected to Axial Loads
Consider the same three bar truss of Example 2.7, but now assume that bar 1 was too short and had to be
stretched an amount ∆ 1 in order to connect to the joint. This is a case of lack of fit, and lack of fit is common in
the fabrication of structures. That is, before the external loads are applied ( Q 1 = Q 2 = 0 ), the truss bars experi
ence initial forces due to the lack of fit of bar 1. Determine the initial forces in the bars using Castigliano’s first
theorem.
Solution The strain energy for bar 1 is determined by the total elongation of the bar, which is the sum of initial
elongation due to lack of fit plus the elongation experienced by bar 1 after the connection to the joint is made.
That is, the total elongation of bar 1 is ∆ 1 + ∆ 1 , where ∆ 1 denotes the additional elongation of bar 1 after the
connection of the bar to the joint is made. Hence, the total strain energy for the system in this case is
3
1 EA 1 EA
U =   ( ∆ 1 + ∆ 1 ) 2 + ∑ 2 L ∆ 2
i
2 L 1 i
i=2
or
3
EA ∂∆ i EA ∂∆ 1
Qn = ∑ L ∆ ∂ q
i
i
n
+ 
∆
L 1 ∂ q n 1
n = 1, 2
i=1
Substitute into this equation the relation between the nodal displacements and the elongation of each bar, eq.
(2.82), after the connection is made to get
Q1 k 11 k 12 q 1 EA cos ( α 1 )
= +  ∆ 1
Q2 k 12 k 22 q2 L 1 sin ( α 1 )
where the elements of the stiffness matrix are the same as given in Example 2.7. Setting Q 1 = 0 and Q 2 = 0 ,
since no external forces are applied to the joint just after assembly, we can solve the above matrix equation for
the joint displacements to get
q1 1 k – k 12 cos ( α 1 ) EA
 22
=   ∆ 1
q2 ( k 11 k 22 – k 12 ) – k 12 k 11 sin ( α 1 ) L 1
2
From this solution we can calculate the elongation of each bar after assembly from
∆ i = cos ( α i ) q 1 + sin ( α i ) q 2 i = 1, 2, 3
50 ThinWalled Structures
Complementary virtual work
EA EA EA
N 1 =  ( ∆ 1 + ∆ 1 ) N 2 =  ∆ 2 N 3 =  ∆ 3
L 1 L 2 L 3
Note that the distributed load does not enter into the equilibrium differential equation (2.86) since it is not part of
the virtual force system (δQ1, δQ2, δN(z)). The virtual force system is required to satisfy equilibrium conditions
separately from the actual force system. If the eq. (2.86) is integrated over the length of the bar we get
L
d
∫ d z( δN ) dz = 0 or δN ( L ) – δN ( 0 ) = 0
0
Substitute into this last expression the boundary conditions from eqs. (2.87) to get
δQ 1 + δQ 2 = 0 (2.88)
The last condition, eq. (2.88), is necessary for overall equilibrium of the bar under the application of the external
virtual forces. The solution to eqs. (2.86) to (2.88) is that the internal virtual force δN ( z ) is uniform in z with
δN = – δQ 1 = δQ 2 (2.89)
Note that eqs. (2.89) are satisfied by the overall equilibrium condition (2.88) of the bar. Only one of the external
virtual forces, either δQ 1 or δQ 2 , is independent and permitted to be varied arbitrarily.
Internal actions, like function δN ( z ) above, that satisfy the equilibrium differential equations and those
boundary conditions where the forces are specified are called statically admissible functions. A statically admis
sible function may not satisfy the governing boundary value problem for the response of the bar. However, within
the set of all statically admissible functions one will lead to strains determined from the material law and the dis
placements determined from the straindisplacement relations such that the specified boundary conditions on the
displacements are satisfied.
ThinWalled Structures 51
Bars Subjected to Axial Loads
Define the product of the prescribed displacements q 1 and q 2 with there corresponding virtual forces δQ 1
* ; i.e.,
and δQ 2 , respectively, as the external complementary virtual work δW ext
*
δW ext = q 1 δQ 1 + q 2 δQ 2 (2.90)
From the solution for the virtual force given in eq. (2.89), the complementary external virtual work can be written
as
*
δW ext = ( q 2 – q 1 )δN (2.91)
Now we relate the strain to the end displacements by integrating the straindisplacement relation given by eq.
(2.4) over the length of the bar to get
L L
dw
∫ ε dz = ∫ d z dz = w ( L ) – w ( 0 ) = q
z 2 – q1 (2.92)
0 0
Equation (2.92) is a condition of compatibility1; it relates the strain in the deformed state of the bar to the speci
fied end displacements. Substitute eq. (2.92) for q 2 – q 1 in eq. (2.91) to get
L
*
δW ext
∫
= ε z dz δN
0
The virtual force is spatially uniform via equilibrium eq. (2.86), so that this last equation can be written as
L
*
δW ext =
∫ ε δN dz
z (2.93)
0
The integrand of this equation contains the strain and the virtual force, and these quantities are defined internal to
the bar. Therefore, we define the righthand side of eq. (2.93) as the internal complementary virtual work δW int * ;
i.e.,
L
*
δW int
∫
≡ ε z δN dz (2.94)
0
The internal complementary virtual work is the integral over the length of the bar of the product of the strain in
the deformed state with the virtual force.
We have shown in the process of going from eq. (2.90) to (2.94) that, for compatible displacements and
strains satisfying eq. (2.92), and for virtual forces satisfying the equilibrium conditions given in eqs. (2.86) to
(2.88), the external complementary virtual work is equal to the internal complementary virtual work. That is, we
have proved the necessary condition that if the displacements and strains are compatible, and the virtual force
system is statically admissible, then the external complementary virtual work equals the internal complementary
virtual work. Compatibility means that the displacements and strains satisfy the straindisplacement equations
1. Compatibility for a deformed body means that the displacements are continuous and singlevalued functions such that
strains are computable and that no gaps or discontinuities occur in the deforming body. More generally, compatibility
means that the strains have to satisfy certain mathematical conditions such that, when integrated, the strain functions lead
to continuous, singlevalued displacements.
52 ThinWalled Structures
Complementary virtual work
and prescribed displacement boundary conditions. In problem solving we assume that equating external comple
mentary virtual to the internal complementary virtual work for every statically admissible system of virtual
forces is sufficient for the displacements and strains of the body to be compatible. We state this principle as fol
lows.
Note that the phrase “variation in the forces” means the virtual forces. For the axially loaded bar, the PCVW
means the displacement function w(z) and strain function εz(z) are compatible if
*
δW ext *
= δW int for every statically admissible virtual force δN ( z ) (2.95)
where the external complementary virtual work is given by eq. (2.90) and the internal complementary virtual
work is given by eq. (2.94). The principle of complementary virtual work is independent of the material behavior.
Apply the principle of complementary virtual work to our bar example. Substitute eq. (2.90) for the external
virtual work and eq. (2.94) for the internal virtual work to get
L
q 1 δQ 1 + q 2 δQ 2 =
∫ ε δN dz
z
0
Requiring the virtual forces to satisfy equilibrium conditions given by eqs. (2.86) to (2.88) results in the solution
given by eq. (2.89). Hence, we can eliminate two of the virtual forces in terms of the third in the third. Say we
take δN = δQ 2 and δQ 1 = – δQ 2 , so that the principle becomes
L
∫
q 2 – q 1 – ε z dz δQ 2 = 0 ∀δQ 2
0
∫
q 2 – q 1 – ε z dz = 0
0
ThinWalled Structures 53
Bars Subjected to Axial Loads
1
δU 0* =  ( N + N t )δN (2.97)
EA
This form of the incremental quantity suggests there is a functional of the axial force whose variation is given by
eq. (2.97). This functional is called the complementary strain energy density, and is denoted by U 0* [ N ( z ) ] . Fol
lowing the developments we used to find the strain energy density functional (refer to eqs. (2.45) to (2.47)) we
would find in a similar manner that the variation of the complementary strain energy density is given by
∂
δU 0* = ( U * )δN (2.98)
∂N 0
Equating eq. (2.97) and eq. (2.98) for every statically admissible virtual force gives
∂ 1
( U * ) =  ( N + N t ) (2.99)
∂N 0 EA
Integrating this expression with respect to N, and taking the constant of integration to be zero when N = 0, we get
the complementary strain energy density as
1 1
U 0* =   N 2 + N N t (2.100)
EA 2
The thermal force appears as a parameter in the complementary strain energy density, since it assumed indepen
dent of the normal force N. The important property of the complementary strain energy density is
∂
εz = (U *) (2.101)
∂N 0
which can be seen from eqs. (2.99) and (2.14). A comparison of eq. (2.101) with eq. (2.48) for the strain energy
density shows the dual attributes that these energies possess: the derivative of the complementary strain energy
density with respect to the axial force gives the strain, and the derivative of the strain energy density with respect
to the strain gives the axial force.
Return to the internal complementary virtual work given by eq. (2.96), and use eq. (2.97) to write it as
L
* *
δW int =
∫ δU 0 dz
0
Now interchange the variational operator and the integral operator in accordance with the second of eqs. (2.34),
and write this equation as
* = δU *
δW int
54 ThinWalled Structures
Relationship between the complementary strain energy and the strain energy densities
U 0* U 0*
N N
EA
1 U0 U0
0 εz 0 εz
(a) linear elastic (b) nonlinear elastic
Fig. 2.20 Strain energy density and complementary strain energy density
under isothermal conditions for a uniaxially loaded bar.
N = EAε z which plots as a straight line with slope of EA to one (Fig. 2.20a). The area between the straight line
1
and the strain axis is  ( ε z ) ( EAε z ) . From eq. (2.47) the strain energy density is given as U 0 = ( EAε z2 ) ⁄ 2 .
2
Hence, the area between the forcestrain curve and the strain axis is the strain energy density. For isothermal
deformation, the complementary strain energy density from eq. (2.100) is U o* = N 2 ⁄ ( 2EA ) . The area between
1 N
the forcestrain curve and the force axis is  ( N )  . Hence, the area between the forcestrain curve and the
2 EA
force axis is the complementary strain energy density. For the linear elastic material under isothermal conditions,
the strain energy density and complementary strain energy density are equal in value, U 0 = U 0* . However, it is
preferred to express the strain energy density as a functional of the strain and the complementary strain energy as
a functional of the axial force, since the former was obtained by considering virtual displacements and the latter
was obtained by considering virtual forces.
Examination of Fig. 2.20a shows that the relationship between the strain energy density and complementary
strain energy density can also be expressed as
U 0* = – U 0 + N ε z (2.103)
Actually, this relationship is more general than for a linear elastic material under isothermal deformation. Equa
tion (2.103) is valid for nonlinear elastic material behavior as is depicted in Fig. 2.20b, and is valid if the defor
mations is caused in part by a temperature change from the stress free state. For a nonlinear elastic material law
and/or in the nonisothermal deformation the complementary strain energy density is not equal in value to the
strain energy density ( U 0* ≠ U 0 ), but eq. (2.103) remains valid.
ThinWalled Structures 55
Bars Subjected to Axial Loads
We derive the complementary strain energy density for a linear elastic material under nonisothermal defor
mation using eq. (2.103). Start with the strain energy density as given by eq. (2.47), which is
1
U 0 =  EAε z2 – EAε zt ε z
2
Use the material law, eq. (2.14), to eliminate the strain in this equation to express the strain energy in terms of the
axial force, and get
t 2 t
1 N N N N
U 0 =  EA  +  – N t  + 
2 EA EA EA EA
which upon simplification becomes
t 2
1 N2 1(N )
U 0 =   –   (2.104)
2 EA 2 EA
Now substitute this result for the strain energy density in eq. (2.103), and substitute the strainforce form of the
material law for the strain in eq. (2.103), to get
t 2 t
1 N2 1(N ) N N
U 0* = –   –   + N  + 
2 EA 2 EA EA EA
After simplification this equation reduces to
1 t 2
U 0* =  [ N 2 + 2N N + ( N t ) ] (2.105)
2EA
Compare this expression to the complementary strain energy density given by eq. (2.100) and we see that the
t 2
expressions differ by the thermal force term ( N ) ⁄ ( 2EA ) . However, this term is irrelevant since it does not con
tribute to the property of the complementary strain energy density that
∂
εz = (U *) (2.106)
∂N 0
That is, both eqs. (2.100) and (2.105) will yield the same resulting form of the strainforce form of the material
t 2
law if substituted into eq. (2.106). Hence, we can drop the term ( N ) ⁄ ( 2EA ) in eq. (2.105) without loss of gen
erality since it is independent of the axial force.
Comparing the complementary strain energy density given by eq. (2.100) to the strain energy density written
in terms of the axial force, eq. (2.104), it is clear that U 0* ≠ U 0 because of the temperature effect.
Consider the uniform bar fixed against rigid body displacement by a support at z = 0, as is shown in the figure
below. That is, the displacement q 1 = 0 . Take the end displacement q 2 to be specified, but not necessarily zero.
End forces Q 1 and Q 2 are regarded as reactions to the prescribed displacements. In addition, the bar is subject to
a uniformly distributed load of intensity p 0 , and a uniform change in temperature ( T – T 0 ) from the stress free
state. Assume the bar is in a state of equilibrium with the displacements and strains being compatible under the
56 ThinWalled Structures
Relationship between the complementary strain energy and the strain energy densities
imposed loads. Apply the principle of complementary virtual work and use, in addition, that the material of the
bar is linear elastic to relate the end displacement q 2 to the applied loads and the reaction Q 2 .
p0
q1 = 0 q 2, Q 2
z L EA = constant
Solution From eq. (2.90) the external complementary virtual work is q 2 δQ 2 , since q 1 = 0 . The internal virtual
* = δU * . The
work is the variation of complementary strain energy, since the bar material is elastic; i.e., δW int
complementary strain energy is given by eq. (2.102) for a linear elastic material. Hence, the principle of comple
mentary virtual work for this linear elastic case is
L
1 2 t
N NN
q 2 δQ 2 = δ 
2 ∫  + 2  dz
EA EA
0
Interchange the variational operator and the integral operator on the righthand side of this equation in accor
dance with the second of eqs. (2.34), then determine the variation of the integrand per the definition of the varia
tion of a functional given by eq. (2.46). Mathematically these operations are
L L
2 t
1 N NN ∂ N2 NtN
δ 
2 ∫  + 2  dz =
EA EA ∫ 2EA EA
 +  δN dz
∂ N 
0 0
Following the principle of complementary virtual work, the virtual forces are to satisfy equilibrium conditions
given in eqs. (2.86) to (2.88), which have the solution given in eq. (2.89). Hence, on the basis of virtual force
equilibrium we can take δN = δQ 2 , and then eq. (2.107) becomes
L
N Nt
q2 –
∫  +  dz δQ 2 = 0
EA EA
∀δQ 2
0
Equation (2.108) can be recognized as the condition of compatibility for the bar made of a linear elastic material
by substituting the strain from the material law given in eq. (2.14) into the integrated form of the straindisplace
ment relation given in eq. (2.92).
ThinWalled Structures 57
Bars Subjected to Axial Loads
L Fig. 2.21
∫
N ( z ) = Q 2 + p 0 dζ = Q 2 + p 0 ( L – z ) (2.109)
z
Note that the force Q 2 is unknown at this point since the displacement q 2 was specified instead of Q 2 . Substi
tute eq. (2.109) for the axial force in eq. (2.108) and perform the integration to get
L L p0 L 2
q 2 = Q 2 + N t +  (2.110)
EA EA 2EA
The exact solution was obtained Section 2.5 as eq. (2.24). Solving eq. (2.24) for displacement q 2 and setting
q 1 = 0 we arrive at eq. (2.110). Equation (2.110) can be used to find the force Q 2 in terms of the prescribed
quantities q 2 , p 0 and N t .
In summary, we have related the displacement q 2 to the corresponding point force Q 2 by first using the
principle of complementary virtual work to establish compatibility between the displacement q 2 and the strain
ε z ; second, we used the linear elastic material law to relate the strain to the axial force N , and finally equilibrium
was used to determine the axial force N such that the unknown force appeared as parameter.
∑ q δQ n n = δU * (2.111)
n=1
From the differential equilibrium equations and the prescribed boundary conditions on the forces, it is possible,
in principle, to write the internal actions (axial force, bending moments, torque, etc.) of the structure in terms of
the independent external point forces Q n . Since the complementary strain energy of the structure is determined
from integrals of the internal actions over the domain of the structure, it becomes, after integration, a function of
58 ThinWalled Structures
Generalized form of Castigliano’s second theorem
U * = U * ( Q 1, Q 2, …, Q N )
Since the virtual forces are independent, we conclude from eq. (2.113) that
∂U *
q n =  n = 1, 2, …, N (2.114)
∂Q n
Equation (2.114) is the general form of Castigliano’s second theorem. Note the similarity of eq. (2.114) to the
property of the complementary strain energy density that the strain is equal to the derivative of the complemen
tary strain energy density with respect to the internal bar force; or, ε z = ∂U * 0 ⁄ ∂N . This theorem is stated for
the general case as (Langhaar, 1962):
∂U *
q n = 
∂Q n
Although this theorem is derived from complementary virtual work where we regarded the displacement as pre
scribed and the corresponding point forces as unknown, it is usually used in practice to determine the displace
ment corresponding to a point force applied to the structure. The example problems to follow will illustrate this
point.
If the material of the bar is linear elastic and there are no thermal strains, we showed in Section 2.10 that the
strain energy density and the complementary strain energy density have the same value. The strain energy and
complementary strain energy have the same value as well since they are defined as integrals over the domain of
the structure of their respective densities. Hence, in this restricted case we can replace U * by U in eq. (2.114) to
get
∂U
qn = (linear elastic, no thermal strain) (2.115)
∂ Qn
Equation (2.115) is Castigliano’s second theorem, which is also called Castigliano’s theorem part II. Note that
eq. (2.115) implies that the strain energy is written in terms of the internal actions of the structure rather than in
ThinWalled Structures 59
Bars Subjected to Axial Loads
its natural form, which is in terms of the strains. Since we prefer to write the strain energy in terms of the strains
and the complementary strain energy in terms of the internal forces or stresses, the implementation of Cas
tigliano’s second theorem in this text will use the complementary strain energy on the righthand side of eq.
(2.115) instead of the strain energy.
Determine the relationship between the displacements and the corresponding forces of the stepped bar in Exam
ple 2.6 on page 43 using Castigliano’s second theorem. There is no change in temperature from the stress free
state.
N ( z ) = Q2 L1 < z < L1 + L2 L1
L1 ( L1 + L2 )
∂ N ∂N N ∂N
(U * ) =
q2 =
∂ Q2 ∫ 
( EA ) 1 ∂ Q 2
dz +
∫ 
( EA ) 2 ∂ Q 2
dz
0 L1
L1 ( L1 + L2 )
( Q1 + Q2 ) Q2
q2 =
∫  ( 1 ) dz +
( EA ) 1 ∫ 
( EA ) 2
( 1 ) dz
0 L1
L
q 1 =  ( Q 1 + Q 2 )
EA 1
60 ThinWalled Structures
Generalized form of Castigliano’s second theorem
L L
q 2 =  ( Q 1 + Q 2 ) +  Q 2
EA 1 EA 2
1 1
 
q1 k1 k1 Q1 EA EA
= k 1 =  k 2 = 
q2 1 1 1 Q2 L 1 L 2
  + 
k1 k1 k2
The 2 x 2 matrix
1 1
 
k1 k1
(2.116)
1 1 1
  + 
k1 k1 k2
is called the flexibility matrix. It is the inverse of the stiffness matrix obtained in Example 2.6, eq. (2.60); i.e.,
1 1 k1 + k2 k2 k1 + k2 1 1
   –   – k 2  + 
k 1 + k 2 –k 2 k 1 k1 k1 k1 k1 k 1 k 2
= = 10
–k 2 k2 1 1 1 k 1 1 01
  + 
k1 k1 k2 0 – 2 + k 2  + 
k1 k 1 k 2
A a uniform bar is suspended from the ceiling and is subjected to self weight and a tip force Q 2 as shown in Fig.
2.23. There is no change in temperature from the stress free state, and the material is linear elastic. The material
has a specific weight denoted by γ which has dimensional units of F ⁄ L 3 . Determine the displacement at the tip
of the bar using Castigliano’s second theorem.
z
N
EA
g L dz
Fig. 2.23 Suspended bar under self γAdz
weight and a tip force
N + dN
q 2, Q 2
ThinWalled Structures 61
Bars Subjected to Axial Loads
Solution The bar is subjected to a distributed load intensity caused by self weight. From the free body diagram
of an element of the bar shown in Fig. 2.23, the equilibrium differential equation is
dN
+ γA = 0 0<z<L
dz
The force prescribed at the tip gives the boundary condition for the axial force as
N ( L ) = Q2
and from the boundary condition prescribed on the axial force, we find the axial force is
N ( z ) = Q 2 + γA ( L – z )
This result for the displacement can be evaluated for Q 2 = 0 , of course, which suggests a method to compute
the displacement at a point on the structure where no point force acts. Merely, put a force at the point in question,
apply Castigliano’s theorem, then set the point force to zero.
2.12 References
Callister, W.D., 1997, Materials Science and Engineering, Fourth Edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York,
pp. 777779, 788, 789.
Courant, R. and Hilbert, D., 1953, Methods of Mathematical Physics, Volume I, Interscience Publishers, Inc.,
62 ThinWalled Structures
Problems
Dym, C.L.,1997, Structural Modeling and Analysis, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, United King
dom, pp. 7395.
Dowling, N.E., 1993, Mechanical Behavior of Materials, PrenticeHall, Inc., Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey, p.
110.
Langhaar, H.L., 1962, Energy Methods in Applied Mechanics, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New York, pp. 75
103, 133136.
Oden, J.T., and Ripperger, E.A., 1981, Mechanics of Elastic Structures, Second Edition, Hemisphere Publish
ing Corporation, New York, pp. 241257.
2.13 Problems
1. Take the bar of Example 2.1 to have a solid circular cross section with a diameter of 0.50 inches, and take its
6
length L = 20 inches. The material is aluminum alloy with a modulus of elasticity E = 10 ×10 psi , yield
3
strength in tension and compression of magnitude σ yield = 47 ×10 psi , and thermal coefficient of expansion
–6
α = 13 ×10 /°F .
a) For the bar subjected to the loads p 0 = 265 lb/in. , q 1 = 0 in. , q 2 = 0.0060 in. , and
T – T 0 = 100 °F , determine the maximum axial displacement, the maximum tensile normal stress,
and the maximum magnitude of the compressive normal stress. (Partial answer: maximum tensile nor
mal stress is 3,494 psi.)
b) Assume proportional loading such that p 0 = ( 265 lb/in. ) λ , q 1 = 0 in. , q 2 = ( 0.0060 in. )λ , and
T – T 0 = ( 100 °F )λ , where λ is a dimensionless load factor. Determine the largest positive value of λ
such that normal stress σ z is between the limits – σ yield ≤ σ z ≤ σ yield and the maximum displacement
w max is less than 0.0180 inches.
2. A bolt is threaded through a tubular sleeve, and the nut is turned up just tight by hand as shown. Using
wrenches, the nut is then turned further, the bolt being put in tension and the sleeve in compression. If the bolt
has 16 threads per inch, and the nut is given an extra quarter turn (900) by the wrenches, estimate the tensile force
in the bolt if the bolt and sleeve are of steel and the crosssectional areas are: Bolt area = 1.00 in2, Sleeve area =
0.60 in2.
6 in.
ThinWalled Structures 63
Bars Subjected to Axial Loads
3. Consider the two term approximation for the displacement of the bar in Example 2.3 on page 34 as given by
eq. (2.42), which is repeated below.
z z
w ( z ) = q 1 sin π  + q 3 sin 3π  0≤z≤L
L L
This is a kinematically admissible displacement function with parameters q1 and q3 unknown. (Refer to Fig. 2.14
on page 36 and the discussion proceeding it.)
a) Use the principle of virtual work to determine the two equilibrium equations associated with the virtual
displacements δq1 and δq3. Do not assume a material law has been specified.
b) Now assume the material is linear elastic and solve for the unknown parameters q1 and q3. Note: the fol
lowing definite integral, with m and n integers, is encountered in the solution.
L L
z z  m = n
cos mπ  cos nπ  dz = 2
∫ L L
0 m≠n
0
c) Calculate the percentage error in the strain energy, maximum displacement, and maximum normal force
with respect to the exact solution. The exact solution is given in Example 2.2 on page 28.
4. A uniform bar with axial stiffness EA and length L is fixed at each end, and it is subjected to an axial distrib
2πz
uted load p z ( z ) = p 0 sin  , 0 ≤ z ≤ L . We seek an approximate solution using the principle of virtual work.
L
pz ( z )
Q1 Q2
EA
z, w
L
32 z z z
w ( z ) =  q  1 –  1 – 2 
3 L L L
where the unknown parameter q represents the displacement at z = L ⁄ 4 and at z = 3L ⁄ 4 . Use the principle
of virtual work, and assume the material of the bar is linear elastic, to determine
a) The value of parameter q in terms of the given data.
b) The strain energy stored in the bar and the percentage difference with respect to the strain energy for the
exact solution. The strain energy in the exact solution is U = ( p 02 L 3 ) ⁄ ( 16π 2 EA ) .
c) The end forces Q 1 and Q 2 and the percentage difference with respect to the exact solution. The end
forces in the exact solution are Q 1 = – Q 2 = – ( p o L ) ⁄ ( 2π ) .
64 ThinWalled Structures
Problems
5
6. The bars in the truss shown have the following
crosssectional areas: A 1 = 1.0 in. 2 , 1
A 2 = A 4 = 2.0 in. 2 , A 3 = 1 ⁄ 2 in. 2 ,
A 5 = A 6 = 3 ⁄ 2 in. 2 . The modulus of elasticity of 2 3 4
40 in.
each bar is 107 psi. Compute the vertical displacement
of the righthand joint using Castigliano’s second theo
rem. Note this truss is statically determinate and all bar 5 6
forces can be determined in terms of external load Q.
30 in. 30 in.
7. Use Castigliano’s’ second theorem to compute the
horizontal displacement of the righthand joint of the Q = 30, 000 lb.
previous problem.
45kN
250°C
4 2
810 mm
3 1
1080 mm 45kN
Use Castigliano’s first theorem to find
a) stiffness matrix in kN/mm,
b) displacement of all joints in mm,
ThinWalled Structures 65
Bars Subjected to Axial Loads
66 ThinWalled Structures
CHAPTER 3 Axial Normal Stress in
Pure Bending and
Extension
In the first four sections the flexure formula for straight, prismatic beams made from a single homogenous, iso
tropic, and linear elastic material is developed. The cross section can be asymmetric or symmetric, and the exam
ples emphasize thinwalled approximations. The flexure formula (eq. 3.27) relates the axial normal stress acting
on the beam's cross section to the components of the bending moment. In the last section we consider combined
extension, pure bending, and thermal effects for multimaterial beams. The axial normal stress in this latter case
is given by eqs. (3.663.68).
ThinWalled Structures 67
Axial Normal Stress in Pure Bending and Extension
y
α
plane of loading
y
M sinα A x Mx
M cosα
z α
A
M cosα
M sinα
M
My
Section AA
Fig. 3.1 A uniform beam subjected to equal and opposite couples at each end.
Plane of bending The plane in which the beam bends is denoted the y – z plane where the y axis is inclined
by the angle β from the yaxis as shown in Fig. 3.2. Note that the plane of bending is not assumed to coincide
with the plane of loading; i.e., α ≠ β. Coordinate axes x and y are rotated through the angle β relative to the x
and y coordinate axes as shown in the figure. A point in the cross section can be located by x and y coordinates
and by x and y coordinates. Consider a typical point A with coordinates x and y. The x and y coordinates of
point A are determined by the geometry shown in Fig. 3.3. From Fig. 3.3, the relationship between these coordi
nates is
x = x cos β – y sin β
(3.1)
y = x sin β + y cos β
The cosines of the angles between the positive coordinate axes, or direction cosines, can be written in tabular
form as shown in Fig. 3.2. For example, the direction cosine of the angle between the x axis and the yaxis is
cos ( 90° + β ) = – sin ( β ) . Note that the sum of the squares of the direction cosines in a row or column equals
unity. Equations (3.1) show that the rows of the direction cosine table are associated with the x  y coordinates.
The inverse of eqs. (3.1) is
68 ThinWalled Structures
Geometry of deformation
y
α
y
β direction cosines
x x y
α x cos β – sin β
plane of bending
β y sin β cos β
M
plane of loading
x
Fig. 3.2 Projection of the plane of loading and the plane of bending onto
the cross section of the beam.
y x sin β
90°
y cos β β A
y Fig. 3.3 Point A located in two Cartesian
90° β coordinate systems, where one system is
rotated through angle β relative to the other.
β
90°
β x
x 90°
y sin β
x cos β
x = x cos β + y sin β
y = – x sin β + y cos β
Hence, the columns of the direction cosine table are associated with the x y coordinates
Axial normal strain The particles on the zaxis in the undeformed beam displace to a circular arc of radius ρ in
the plane of bending, which we call the zcurve. See Fig. 3.4. If the beam is considered to be made up of longitu
dinal fibers, then fibers parallel to the zaxis in the undeformed beam deform into concentric circular arcs. Some
of these parallel fibers are elongated and some are shortened. Consequently, the fibers on some surface between
the top and bottom surfaces of the beam, called the neutral surface, will remain the same length. Although we do
not know the location of the neutral surface at this point, we take the zaxis to lie in the neutral surface of the
ThinWalled Structures 69
Axial Normal Stress in Pure Bending and Extension
undeformed beam. We will show later that the neutral surface in the undeformed beam coincides with the x z
plane.
z
ρ
Fig. 3.4 Beam deformed into a circular arc in the plane of bending.
)
An element in the undeformed beam of length ∆z bounded by two parallel line segments PQ and RS is
)
shown in Fig. 3.5. Line PQ is part of the zaxis and line RS is characterized by a constant y coordinate value.
–θ
– θ + ∆θ
y R* y
P* S*
R S ρ ∆θ
θ y Q*
z P Q
z ∆z
In the deformed geometry these line segments map to concentric circular arcs P * Q * and R * S * . Let θ denote the
rotation of a line element originally parallel to the y direction in the undeformed beam, positive clockwise.
Since cross sections remain perpendicular to the neutral surface in the deformed beam, the angle θ is also equal
)
to the rotation of the line element coinciding with zaxis. In Fig. 3.5, the line P * R * is shown to rotate counter
)
clockwise which corresponds to a – θ , and line Q * S * is shown to rotate clockwise through angle – θ + ∆θ .
)
Then, the included angle between sections P * R * and Q * S * is ∆θ. The radius of the arc P * Q * is ρ as described
in the previous paragraph. It is assumed that the distortion of the cross section in the plane of bending is negligi
70 ThinWalled Structures
Geometry of deformation
)
ble, so that the distance between the two circular arcs P * Q * and R * S * remains y . Hence, the radius of arc
)
)
R * S * is ρ + y . The strain of line element RS is defined as
)
R * S * – RS
ε z =  (3.2)
)
RS
From Fig. 3.5
)
R * S * = ( ρ + y )∆θ (3.3)
)
)
and since line element P * Q * is in the neutral surface P * Q * = PQ = R S = ρ∆θ . Thus, eq. (3.2) becomes
)
)
R*S* – P*Q* ( ρ + y )∆θ – ρ∆θ y
ε z =  =  =  (3.4)
ρ∆θ ρ
)
P*Q*
)
)
Also, we have P * Q * = ρ∆θ = ∆z , since the line element P * Q * is in the neutral surface. From this relation we
have in the limit as ∆z → 0 and ∆θ → 0 , the following equation for the curvature of the zcurve in the deformed
beam
1 dθ
 =  = θ′ (3.5)
ρ dz
where the prime denotes a derivative with respect to z. Equation (3.5) is consistent with the definition of curva
ture as the change in the slope angle of the curve with respect to its arc length. Hence,
ε z = yθ′ (3.6)
Equation (3.6) shows that the normal strain of a line element parallel to the zaxis is proportional to the distance
from the zaxis times the curvature. Fibers above the zaxis ( y > 0 ) are stretched ( ε z > 0 ) if the beam is bent
convex side up ( 1 ⁄ ρ > 0 ). Fibers below the zaxis are shortened ( ε z < 0 ) if the beam is bent convex side up (Fig.
3.4).
Projection of the zcurve onto the xz and yz planes Now we need to express the normal strain given by eq.
(3.6) in terms of the xy coordinate system. This is accomplished by projecting the zcurve in the deformed beam,
which lies in the y – z plane, onto the coordinate planes xz and yz. The zcurve is represented in the xyz coor
dinate system by introducing displacement functions u ( z ), v ( z ), and w ( z ) that represent the x, y, and zdirec
tion displacements, respectively, of a particle at point P on the zaxis. Under the deformation the particle
originally at P with coordinates ( 0, 0, z ) displaces to the point P* with coordinates ( u ( z ), v ( z ), z + w ( z ) ) . See
Fig. 3.6.
Also the displacements of the particle at P can be represented in the x  y z coordinate system. Let u ( z )
v ( z ) denote the displacements in the x  and y directions, respectively, of the particle at point at P. These dis
placement components are related to components u ( z ) and v ( z ) by the considering the position of the projec
tion of P* onto the xy plane. The projection of P* onto the xy plane is labeled point P 3* in Fig. 3.6 and Fig.
ThinWalled Structures 71
Axial Normal Stress in Pure Bending and Extension
v(z)
P 1*
P: ( 0, 0, z ) P 3*
θx x
P*
w(z)
u(z)
Q*
z P 2*
θy
Fig. 3.6 Displacements of the particle from P to P*, and the rotations of the
projections of a line element P*Q*.
3.7. From Fig. 3.7, the displacement components in the x  y coordinates are related to those in the xy coordi
y v
v P 3*
y
β
x u
P
plane of bending
u
nates by
u = u cos β – v sin β
(3.7)
v = u sin β + v cos β
which is of the same form as the coordinate transformations given by eq. (3.1) with the coordinates replaced by
their respective displacements. Since the zcurve lies in the y – z plane, displacement u = 0 for all z. That is,
point P 3* is in the y z plane. Also, the angle β is independent of the zcoordinate, since the beam is assumed to
deform into a plane circular arc. Next we relate the rotation, or slope, of an element of the zcurve in the plane of
bending to the rotations its projections onto the xz and yz planes.
72 ThinWalled Structures
Geometry of deformation
)
)
The displacement and rotation of an infinitesimal line element PQ on the zaxis to P * Q * on the zcurve is
shown in Fig. 3.8. Since the line element does not change length we have by the Pythagorean theorem in the
P * dz + dw
v w θ
– dv
dz
Q*
v + dv w + dw
P Q
z
z z + dz z* z * + dz *
Fig. 3.8 Displacement and rotation of an infinitesimal line element on the zaxis
in the plane of bending.
deformed state that ( dz ) 2 = ( dz + dw ) 2 + ( – dv ) 2 . Hence, in the limit as dz → 0 , the derivative of the axial dis
placement is related to the derivative of the lateral displacement by
( 1 + w′ ) 2 + ( – v′ ) 2 = 1 (3.8)
As is shown in Fig. 3.8, the rotation, or slope, of the zcurve is related to displacement v by
dv
θ ≅ sin θ = –  = – v′ (3.9)
dz
where we assume the angle θ is small so that the sine of it can be replaced by the angle itself in radians. Differ
entiating eqs. (3.7) with respect to z, and noting that u = 0 and the angle β is constant for all z, we get
0 = u′ cos β – v′ sin β
(3.10)
– θ = u′ sin β + v′ cos β
The derivatives of the displacement components in the x  and y coordinate directions are directly related to
the rotations of the projections of the zcurve onto the xz and yz planes. The projection of point P* on the onto
the yz plane is labeled P 1* , and its projection onto the xz plane is labeled P 2* , as is shown in Fig. 3.6. Points P 1*
and P 2* and the projections of the differential line element along the zcurve onto the coordinate planes shown in
Fig. 3.6 are also shown in Fig. 3.9. From the differential geometry of Fig. 3.9, we have in the limit as dz → 0
that
– v′ – u′
tan θ x =  tan θ y =  (3.11)
1 + w′ 1 + w′
Since v′ is assumed small with respect to unity, eq. (3.8) yields that w′ is also small with respect to unity. Thus,
we neglect w′ with respect to one in the denominators of eqs. (3.11), and approximate the rotations of the projec
tions as
θ x = – v′ θ y = – u′ (3.12)
ThinWalled Structures 73
Axial Normal Stress in Pure Bending and Extension
y x
P 1* dz + dw P 2* dz + dw
θ x – dv θ y – du
v u
v + dv u + du
z z
z* z * + dz * z* z * + dz *
Fig. 3.9 Rotations of the projections of the zcurve onto the cartesian planes.
where the tangent of a small angle is approximated by the angle itself in radians. Thus, eqs. (3.10) become
0 = – θ y cos β + θ x sin β
(3.13)
θ = θ y sin β + θ x cos β
which are the relations between the rotation of the zcurve to the rotations of its projections onto the coordinate
planes. Solving these equations for the rotations in the xy coordinate system, we get
θ y = θ sin β θ x = θ cos β (3.14)
Equations (3.14) show that for small rotations, the rotations of the projected curves are simply the components
of the rotation of the zcurve .
Normal strain in the xyz system Finally, the strain given by eq. (3.6) is written in terms of the xy system by
substituting the second of eqs. (3.1) for y , and the derivative of the second of eqs. (3.13) for θ′ , to get
Differentiating the first of eqs. (3.13), recalling that angle β is independent of z, results in the relation
θ′ y cos β = θ′ x sin β
Now use this result in the previous equation to get the strain expressed as
ε z = xθ′ y + yθ′ x (3.15)
where the curvatures of the projected curves are determined from eqs. (3.12) to be
θ′ y = – u″ θ′ x = – v″ (3.16)
74 ThinWalled Structures
Bending normal stress — flexure formula
1 ν ν
 –  – 
εx E E E σ
x
ν
= –  1 ν (3.17)
εy  –  σ y
E E E
εz σz
ν ν 1
–  –  
E E E
where E is the modulus of elasticity and ν is Possion’s ratio. The material law for a linear elastic, isotropic mate
rial is called Hooke's law. Material properties E and ν which vary from point to point in the cross section (xy
plane) are permissible, but the material properties are assumed uniform along the zaxis. Thus, a laminated beam
of more than one material may be considered, which is addressed in Section 3.5. However, in this section we
limit consideration to a beam made of a single homogeneous material, so that E and ν are independent of the spa
tial coordinates x, y and z. Now we make the third basic assumption of beam theory:
σ z = Eε z (3.18)
The distribution of normal stresses given by eq. (3.19) over the cross section is, in general, statically equiva
lent to the resultants N, Mx, and My as shown in Fig. 3.10. The axial load N, and bending moments Mx and My
are related to the normal stress by
N =
∫ ∫ σ dA
A
z Mx =
∫ ∫ yσ dA
A
z My =
∫ ∫ xσ dA
A
z (3.20)
where dA = dxdy is an area element in the crosssectional area denoted by A. Substituting eq. (3.19) into eq.
(3.20) and integrating over the cross section we obtain
ThinWalled Structures 75
Axial Normal Stress in Pure Bending and Extension
y
dA ⇔ Mx
x N
z σz z
My
x
Fig. 3.10 Statical equivalence of the normal stress to the beam resultants.
N = EQ x θ′ x + EQ y θ′ y
M x = EI xx θ′ x + EI xy θ′ y (3.21)
M y = EI xy θ′ x + EI yy θ′ y
in which we defined
Qx =
∫ ∫ ydA
A
Qy =
∫ ∫ xdA
A
(3.22)
and
2 2
I xx =
∫ ∫ y dA
A
I yy =
∫ ∫ x dA
A
I xy =
∫ ∫ xy dA
A
(3.23)
In obtaining the results shown in eqs. (3.21), the modulus of elasticity E was brought outside the area inte
grals since it is independent of x and y for a homogeneous material cross section. The integrals in eqs. (3.22) and
(3.23) are purely geometric quantities. They reflect how the area is distributed with respect to the x and ycoordi
nate axes. The quantities Qx and Qy in eqs. (3.22) are called first area moments since the power of the coordi
nate in the integrand is unity, while the Ixx and Iyy in eqs. (3.23) are called second area moments since the power
of the coordinates in the integrand is two. The quantity Ixy is called the product area moment.
For the case of pure bending, only moments Mx and My are nonzero, so the axial force N must vanish. Set
ting N = 0 in the first of eqs. (3.21) implies that
( N = 0) ⇒ Qx = Qy = 0 (3.24)
The first area moments vanish if the xaxis and the yaxis pass through the centroid of the crosssectional area.
This locates the zaxis; i.e., the zaxis of the beam passes through the centroid of each cross section. For centroi
dal coordinates in the cross section, the momentcurvature relationship of eq. (3.21) can be written in the matrix
form
76 ThinWalled Structures
Bending normal stress — flexure formula
Mx I xx I xy θ′ x
= E (3.25)
My I xy I yy θ′ y
where the second are moments are computed for centroidal coordinates in the cross section. The curvature
moment relationship is the inverse of this, or
θ′ x 1 I yy – I xy M x
= 
2
(3.26)
θ′ y E ( I xx I yy – I xy ) – I xy I xx M y
Equations (3.25) and (3.26) are regarded as the material law for beam bending, and these equations are valid only
if the x and yaxes pass through the centroid of the cross section.
The formula for the bending normal stress σz in eq. (3.19) can be written in terms of the bending moments
Mx and My by using the curvaturemoment relation in eq. (3.26). Substituting the curvatures from eq. (3.26) into
eq. (3.19) we get
– I xy M x + I xx M y I yy M x – I xy M y
σ z =  x + 
 y (3.27)
I xx I yy – I xy 2 I xx I yy – I xy 2
I yy y – I xy x I xx x – I xy y
σ z =  M x +  My (3.28)
I xx I yy – I xy 2 I xx I yy – I xy 2
Equation (3.27), or its equivalent eq. (3.28), is called the flexure formula, since it determines the normal stress at
crosssectional coordinates x and y due to bending. Notice that the bending normal stress is zero at the origin,
which coincides with the centroid of the cross section, and that the bending normal stress varies linearly in x and
y over the cross section. Thus, the extreme values of the bending normal stress occur somewhere on the boundary
of the cross section where coordinates x and y can attain their largest values.
The plane of bending of the beam can be determined in terms of the bending moment components Mx and
My by first differentiating eqs. (3.14) with respect to z and recognizing that the zcurve lies in the plane of bend
ing (angle β is independent of z for pure bending). Second, solve the resulting equations for β to get
θ′
tan β = y (3.29)
θ′ x
Now use eq. (3.26) to eliminate the curvatures in eq. (3.29) to find
– I xy M x + I xx M y
tan β = 
 (3.30)
I yy M x – I xy M y
Thus, knowing the bending moment components and the second area moments of the cross section, the angle β,
and hence the plane of bending, is determined by eq. (3.30). The axis normal to the plane of bending through the
centroid is labeled as the x axis in Fig. 3.2. On the x axis y = 0 , so that from straincurvature relation given
by eq. (3.6) the normal strain ε z = 0 on the x axis. Also, from Hooke’s law this means that the bending normal
ThinWalled Structures 77
Axial Normal Stress in Pure Bending and Extension
stress σ z = 0 on the x axis. Since ε z = 0 on the x axis, the x axis is called the neutral axis . The particles in
x z plane map to the neutral surface in the deformed beam. The equation for the neutral axis in the cross section
is determined from the condition that y = 0 in the first of eqs. (3.1). We get
0 = ( x sin β + y cos β ) NA
or y NA = – x NA tan β (3.31)
The neutral axis passes through the centroid of the cross section, since the centroid was used as the origin of
the xy system. If the axial force N ≠ 0 in addition to nonzero bending moments, then the axis of zero stress, or
the neutral axis, will no longer pass through the centroid, but will be parallel to the line obtained from eq. (3.31).
From Fig. 3.1, recall that the plane of loading is located by
M
tan α = y
Mx
Equation (3.32) shows that, in general, the plane of loading and the plane of bending do not concide ( α ≠ β ). The
plane of loading and the plane of bending coincide if I xy = 0 and M x = 0 , or I xy = 0 and M y = 0 , or
I xy = 0 and I xx = I yy .
EXAMPLE 3.1 Bending normal stress distribution in a cantilever beam with a thinwalled zee section.
The cantilever beam shown in Fig. 3.11 is subjected to a bending moment M at its tip. The crosssectional
dimensions a and t are considered known with 0 < t/a << 1; i.e., this is a thinwalled section. Note that only the
center line of the wall is drawn in the sketch of the cross section and not the thickness, since the thickness is
small. The wall center line is called the contour of the cross section. Given that the second area moments about
the centroidal axes x and y are
8 2
I xx =  a 3 t I yy =  a 3 t I xy = – a 3 t (3.33)
3 3
determine the neutral axis in the cross section and the distribution of the bending normal stress.
Solution First, note that the components of the bending moment are M x = – M and M y = 0 . Thus, the plane
of the couple whose moment is M is the yz plane, or the angle α = π for the plane of loading shown in Fig.
3.1. From eq. (3.30)
– I xy –( –a 3 t ) 3
tan β =  =  =  so β = 56.31°
I yy 2 3 2
 a t
3
3
and from eq. (3.31) the equation of the neutral axis in the cross section is y NA = –  x NA .
2
78 ThinWalled Structures
Bending normal stress — flexure formula
y y
a
M
z centroid
a
C x
t, typical a
a
Fig. 3.11 Pure bending of a cantilevered beam with a zee cross section
Cross Section
2 a 3 t y – ( – a 3 t )x
3 M
σ z =  ( – M ) = – ( 6y + 9x ) 
3t
8 2
 a 3 t  a 3 t – ( – a 3 t ) 2 7a
3 3
We plot the bending normal stress on the contour only. Coordinates x and y are related on the contour. That is,
top flange: –a ≤ x ≤ 0 y = a
web: x = 0 –a ≤ y ≤ a
bottom flange: 0≤x≤a y = –a
The neutral axis and the bending normal stress distribution are shown in Fig. 3.12.
ThinWalled Structures 79
Axial Normal Stress in Pure Bending and Extension
6M
–  

3M 7 a2t
 

7 a2t
y
σz
3M
–  

7 a2t
6M 3
 
 y NA = –  x NA
7 a2t 2
Determine the lateral displacement functions u(z) and v(z), 0 ≤ z ≤ L, for the zee section beam of Example 3.1.
Solution First note that this a statically determinate problem. So the equilibrium equations are satisfied for
M x = – M and M y = 0 for all z ∈ ( 0, L ) , where M denotes the specified end moment. To find the lateral dis
placements u ( z ) and v ( z ) , 0 ≤ z ≤ L , we begin with the curvaturemoment relations given by eqs. (3.26). These
equations are repeated below.
θ′ x 1 I yy – I xy M x
= 
2 )
θ′ y E ( I xx I yy – I xy – I xy I xx M y
From equilibrium we have M x = – M and M y = 0 for 0 ≤ z ≤ L . From the given data for the second area
8 2
moments we know I xx =  a 3 t , I yy =  a 3 t , and I xy = – a 3 t . Thus,
3 3
2 = 8
det ( I ) = I xx I yy – I xy
2 7
 ×  – ( – 1 ) 2 a 6 t 2 =  a 6 t 2 (3.34)
3 3 9
Substitute these data into curvaturemoment relations above to get
6 M 9 M
θ′ x = –  
 θ′ y = –  
 (3.35)
7 Ea 3 t 7 Ea 3 t
80 ThinWalled Structures
Bending normal stress — flexure formula
6 M 9 M
θ x = –  
 z + c1 θ y = –  
 z + c2 (3.36)
7 Ea 3 t 7 Ea 3 t
The constants due to indefinite integration are determined from the boundary conditions. At z = 0 the beam is
clamped to the rigid wall. Hence the cross section at z = 0 is prevented from rotation, and this means θ x ( 0 ) = 0
and θ y ( 0 ) = 0 . Substituting these boundary conditions into eqs. (3.36), we find c 1 = 0 and c 2 = 0 . Hence,
the rotations are
6 M 9 M
θ x = –  
 z θ y = –  
 z 0≤z≤L (3.37)
7 Ea 3 t 7 Ea 3 t
The rotationdisplacement relations are given in eqs. (3.12), and are repeated below.
θ x = – v′ θ y = – u′
6 M 9 M
v′ =  
 z u′ =  
 z (3.38)
7 Ea 3 t 7 Ea 3 t
Integrate these equations with respect to z to get
3 M 2 9 M 2
v =  
 z + c3 u =  
 z + c4 (3.39)
7 Ea 3 t 14 Ea 3 t
The constants of indefinite integration are evaluated by the boundary conditions. Since the beam is fixed to the
rigid wall at z = 0, we have v ( 0 ) = 0 and u ( 0 ) = 0 . Substitute these boundary conditions into eqs. (3.39) to
find that c 3 = 0 and c 4 = 0 . Hence the lateral displacements of the beam are
3 M 2 9 M 2
v =  
 z u =  
 z 0≤z≤L (3.40)
7 Ea 3 t 14 Ea 3 t
A plot of the zaxis in the deformed beam, or zcurve, is shown in Fig. 3.13. In the plot the scaled lateral dis
placements are defined by
ThinWalled Structures 81
Axial Normal Stress in Pure Bending and Extension
Ea 3 t Ea 3 t
v = v 2 u = u 2
ML ML
zcurve
0.4
ê0.3
v
0.2
0.1
0 0.6
0
0.4
0.25
ê
u
0.5 0.2
zêL 0.75
0
1
The view of the lateral displacements at the end of the beam are shown in Fig. 3.14.
y
y
M
β = 56.3°
v( L)
x
u( L)
Fig. 3.14 Displacement of the tip of the cantilevered, zee section beam.
82 ThinWalled Structures
Moments of areas
Qx =
∫ ∫ ydA
A
Qy =
∫ ∫ xdA
A
(3.41)
in which the area element d A = d xd y . The relationship between the two parallel coordinate systems is deter
mined from the location of a generic point in the plane in each system. That is
x = xc + x y = yc + y (3.42)
The relationship between the area elements is d A = dA where dA = dxdy , since the ( x c, y c ) values are
fixed. If eqs. (3.42) are substituted into eqs. (3.41), we get
Q x = yc A + Q x Q y = xc A + Q y (3.43)
where
A =
∫∫
A
dA Qx =
∫ ∫ ydA
A
Qy =
∫ ∫ xdA
A
(3.44)
Since the origin of the x and y system is at the centroid, the first moments Qx and Qy are zero by definition. Set
ting Q x = 0 and Q y = 0 in eqs. (3.43), we can solve to find the location of the centroid as
ThinWalled Structures 83
Axial Normal Stress in Pure Bending and Extension
Q Q
x c = y y c = x (3.45)
A A
2 2
I xx =
∫ ∫ y dA
A
I yy =
∫ ∫ x dA
A
I xy =
∫ ∫ xy dA
A
(3.46)
Second area moments are often called moments of inertia in analogy to moments of inertia of mass elements
used in rigid body dynamics. The fact that eqs. (3.46) are second moments of area elements and not mass ele
ments should be kept in mind even if the terminology “moments of inertia” is used in the context of beam bend
ing. Now substitute eqs. (3.42) for the x and y coordinates into eqs. (3.46) to get
I xx = y c2 A + 2y c Q x + I xx
I yy = x c2 A + 2x c Q y + I yy (3.47)
I xy = x c y c A + x c Q x + y c Q y + I xy
where the second area moments in the x and y system are defined as
2 2
I xx =
∫ ∫ y dA
A
I yy =
∫ ∫ x dA
A
I xy =
∫ ∫ xy dA
A
(3.48)
Since the x and y coordinates are centroidal, Qx = Qy = 0, and eqs. (3.47) reduce to
I xx = y c2 A + I xx I yy = x c2 A + I yy I xy = x c y c A + I xy (3.49)
Equations (3.43) and (3.47) are the generalized parallel axis theorem, but in problem solving we use eqs. (3.43)
to find the centroid and then the parallel axis theorem reduces to the use of eqs. (3.49). Note that eqs. (3.48) show
that the Ixx and Iyy are always positive in value with dimensional units of L4. The product area moment Ixy can be
positive, zero, or negative in value. The product area moment Ixy is zero if either the x axis or y axis is a axis of
symmetry of the cross section.
Radius of gyration It is common with respect to the second area moments Ixx and Iyy to define radii of gyration
by the definitions
rx = I xx ⁄ A ry = I yy ⁄ A (3.50)
The radii of gyration rx and ry have dimensional units of length. However the radii of gyration do not locate a
physically significant point in the cross section. For example, r x ≠ y c + r x , where r x it the radius of gyration
with respect to the x axis. (Using the parallel axis theorem, the relation between the radius of gyration about the
x axis to the xaxis is r x2 = y c2 + r x2 .)
Approximations in thinwalled sections For thinwalled sections, the thickness t of the wall is much smaller
than the largest dimension in the cross section. This geometry permits simplifications with respect to computing
the first and second area moments without loss of significant accuracy with respect to an exact computation. As
an example we model the thinwalled zee section with thin rectangular elements for the web and flanges as is
84 ThinWalled Structures
Moments of areas
shown in Fig. 3.16 The gap and overlap at the corners are ignored. Instead of an actual drawing of the zee sec
t t
0 <  « 1
h
Fig. 3.16 Modeling a thinwalled zee section with rectangular elements for the web and flanges
tion, or a sketch of the mathematical representation as shown in Fig. 3.16, we merely draw the contour of the
section to represent it. The contour consists of the locus of points in the middle of the wall for each branch of the
cross section. The contour for the zee section is illustrated in Fig. 3.11. The term “branch” is used to mean either
a flange or web of the zee section. The slope of the contour is continuous within the branch. At the junctions
between branches, like the webflange junctions of the zee section, the contour usually exhibits a discontinuous
slope. The contour may be a curve in the xy plane for more complex sections.
ThinWalled Structures 85
Axial Normal Stress in Pure Bending and Extension
N N N
A = ∑ Ai Ay c = ∑ yi Ai Ax c = ∑ xi Ai (3.52)
i = 1, 2, … i = 1, 2, … i = 1, 2, …
I xx = ∑ ( I xx + y 2 A ) i (3.53)
i = 1, 2, …
I yy = ∑ ( I yy + x 2 A ) i (3.54)
i = 1, 2, …
I xy = ∑ ( I xy + xy A ) i (3.55)
i = 1, 2, …
where A i, x i, y i, ( I xx ) i, ( I yy ) i, ( I xy ) i are the known properties of the ith subarea. The overall centroid of the area
is computed from the last two formulas in eqs. (3.52). The second area moments for the reference system deter
mined from eqs. (3.53) to (3.55) are then used with the coordinates of the overall centroid to compute the second
area moments about the centroidal x and y axes by the parallel axis theorem. This method is best illustrated by
example.
EXAMPLE 3.3 Thinwalled zee section properties by the composite body technique
Determine the centroid and the second area moments for the thinwalled zee section of Example 3.1. The section
is subdivided into three rectangular branches as shown in Fig. 3.19. One branch corresponds to the web and two
branches correspond to the flanges.
Solution First we find the centroid. Equations (3.52) are represented in the table shown below. Summation of the
appropriate columns gives
A = 4at xc A = 0 y c A = 4a 2 t
86 ThinWalled Structures
Moments of areas
y y, y
y3
t = thickness of all branches
x3
a⁄2
a
a
y2
C
x2 x
a y1 yc = a
x1
x x
O a⁄2 O
a
The second area moments are computed for the reference coordinate system ( x, y ) using the second table
shown below. Note that for the local centroidal coordinate systems in each branch we can identify the angle φ in
i Ai xi yi xi Ai yi Ai
1 at a/2 0 a2t/2 0
2 2at 0 a 0 2a2t
3 at – a/2 2a – a2t/2 2a2t
Sum 4at 0 4a2t
eqs. (3.51) as φ 1 = 0° , φ 2 = 90° , and φ 3 = 0° . These values of the angle φ in each branch are used to com
pute the local second area moments in each rectangular branch via eqs. (3.51). From the summation of the col
i y i2 A i ( I xx ) i x i2 A i ( I yy ) i xi yi Ai ( I xy ) i
1 0 0 a3t/4 a3t/12 0 0
2 (a2)2at (2a)3t/12 0 0 0 0
3 (2a)2at 0 a3t/4 a3t/12 – a3t 0
Sum 6a3t 2a3t/3 a3t/2 a3t/6 – a3t 0
umns, the second area moments in the ( x, y ) system via eqs. (3.53) to (3.55) are
ThinWalled Structures 87
Axial Normal Stress in Pure Bending and Extension
I xx = 6a 3 t + 2a 3 t ⁄ 3 = ( 20a 3 t ) ⁄ 3
I yy = ( a 3 t ) ⁄ 2 + ( a 3 t ) ⁄ 6 = ( 2a 3 t ) ⁄ 3
I xy = – a 3 t
Now we use the parallel axis theorem to transfer these moments to the centroidal system. Equations (3.49) give
20 8
I xx = I xx – y c2 A =  a 3 t – a 2 ( 4at ) =  a 3 t
3 3
2 2
I yy = I yy – x c2 A =  a 3 t – ( 0 ) ( 4at ) =  a 3 t
3 3
I xy = I xy – x c y c A = – a 3 t – ( 0 ) ( a ) ( 4at ) = – a 3 t
These are the second area moments given the problem statement of Example 3.1.
The beam cross section consists of a thinwalled semicircular web of radius a and thickness t, and two stringers
each with area A s = ( πat ) ⁄ 2 . The section and the reference coordinate system are shown Fig. 3.20. Determine
y y y
As As
ds
s
θ O O
x x, x
C
a
t As As
Fig. 3.20 Stringerstiffened, semicircular section.
Solution Since this cross section is symmetric with respect to the x axis, the centroid is located on this axis, and
the product area moment I xy is zero. In thinwalled construction the stringer’s crosssectional dimensions are
small with respect to the largest dimension of the cross section. Hence, the stringer is modeled by its area As con
centrated at the stringer’s centroid. Also, the second area moments of the stringer area are neglected with respect
to the transfer terms in the parallel axis theorem. It is convenient to use the polar angle θ in the moment compu
tations for the web, where – π ⁄ 2 ≤ θ ≤ π ⁄ 2 , as is shown in the figure. The differential area of the web is
dA = tds = tadθ , and the coordinates to this differential area are x = – acos θ and y = asin θ . The
crosssectional area is
88 ThinWalled Structures
Extension, pure bending, and thermal effects for multimaterial beams
π

2
π
= πat + 2  at = 2πat
A =
∫ ta dθ + 2 A s 2
π
– 
2
From the second of eqs. (3.41), the first area moment about the y axis is
π⁄2
( – acos θ )ta dθ = – 2a 2 t
Qy =
∫
–π ⁄ 2
and from the second of eqs. (3.43) with Q y = 0 by the definition of the centroid we find x c A = – 2a 2 t . Thus,
the centroid is located at
– 2a 2 t a
x c =  = –  yc = 0
2πat π
The second area moment about the x axis is (see the first of eqs. (3.46))
π⁄2 π⁄2
θ 1 3
( asin θ ) 2 ta dθ + a 2 A s + ( – a ) 2 A s = a 3 t  –  sin 2θ + πa 3 t =  πa 3 t
I xx =
∫ 2 4
–π ⁄ 2
2
–π ⁄ 2
π⁄2 π⁄2
θ 1 π
( – acos θ ) 2 ta dθ + 2 ( 0 ) 2 A s = a 3 t  +  sin 2θ =  a 3 t
I yy =
∫ 2 4
–π ⁄ 2
2
–π ⁄ 2
Now we use the parallel axis theorem, eqs. (3.49), to get the second area moments about the centroidal system.
3 3
I xx = I xx – y c2 A =  πa 3 t – ( 0 ) 2 A =  πa 3 t
2 2
π a 2 π 2
I yy = I yy – x c2 A =  a 3 t – –  2πat = a 3 t  – 
2 π 2 π
To summarize, the second area moments about the centroidal system are
I xx = 4.712a 3 t I yy = 0.934a 3 t I xy = 0
ThinWalled Structures 89
Axial Normal Stress in Pure Bending and Extension
dz dz + dw
z
z w + dw
w(z)
( dz + dw ) – dz
ε z =  which in the limit as dz → 0 gives ε z = w′
dz
For combined bending and extension, we superpose the extensional strain and the bending strain, eq. (3.15), to
obtained the total strain. Hence,
ε z = w′ + xθ′ y + yθ′ x
{
extension bending (3.56)
Material law Consider Hooke’s law for the case of thermal strain. A change in temperature causes an expan
sion of an unrestrained beam element without an associated mechanical stress. If mechanical stresses are present
then the total strain is composed of the sum of the mechanical strain and the thermal strain. That is,
εz = σz ⁄ E + α ( T – T 0 )
in which T denotes the temperature, T 0 the stressfree temperature, α the coefficient of linear thermal expan
sion (CTE) of the material, and E denotes the modulus of elasticity of the material. If the temperature is given in
degrees fahrenheit ( °F ), then the CTE has dimensional units 1 ⁄ °F . In the material law for the beam given by
eq. (3.57), we have assumed that the lateral stresses σ x and σ y are negligible with respect to the axial normal
stress σ z and that the thermal strains in the x and ydirections can be neglected. Solving eq. (3.57) for the axial
normal stress we get
σ z = Eε z – Eα∆T (3.58)
where
∆T = T – T 0 (3.59)
In general the material properties E and α can be a function of the temperature as well. However, we assume
that over moderate temperature changes these material properties do not vary significantly from an average value.
In addition to the thermal effects, we assume that the beam cross section is hetrogeneous; i.e., the material
properties E and α are functions of coordinates x and y. In the case of heterogeneity, we define a reference mod
ulus of elasticity E 0 , which is usually selected as some convenient positive value in problem solving. The refer
ence modulus is independent of x and y. We write eq. (3.58) as
90 ThinWalled Structures
Extension, pure bending, and thermal effects for multimaterial beams
E
σ z = E 0  ε z – Eα∆T (3.60)
E 0
Resultants We substitute the straindisplacement relation,eq. (3.56), into eq. (3.60) for the axial normal strain to
get
E
σ z = E 0  ( w′ + xθ′ y + yθ′ x ) – Eα∆T (3.61)
E 0
Recall that the beam resultants, first given by eqs. (3.20), are
N =
∫ ∫ σ dA
A
z Mx =
∫ ∫ yσ dA
A
z My =
∫ ∫ xσ dA
A
z
Now substitute eq. (3.61) for the axial normal stress in these beam resultants to get the material law for the beam.
We write the final expression of the material law for the resultants in the matrix form
N A * Q x* Q y* w′ Nt
M x = E 0 Q x* I xx
* I*
xy
θ′ x – M xt (3.62)
My Q y* I xy
* I*
yy
θ′ y M yt
E E
Q x* = Q y* =
∫ ∫ 
A
E
 ydA
0
∫ ∫ 
A
E 0
 xdA (3.64)
* = E 2 * = E 2
I xx
∫ ∫ 
A
E 0
 y dA I yy
∫ ∫ 
A
E 0
 x dA (3.65)
* = E
I xy
∫ ∫ 
A
E
 xy d A
0
(3.66)
Nt =
∫ ∫ Eα∆T dA
A
(3.67)
M xt = M yt =
∫ ∫ y ( Eα∆T ) dA
A
∫ ∫ x ( Eα∆T ) dA
A
(3.68)
ThinWalled Structures 91
Axial Normal Stress in Pure Bending and Extension
We take the origin of the xy coordinate system at the modulusweighted centroid. The modulusweighted
centroid is characterized by the fact that the modulusweighted first area moments vanish; i.e.,
Q x* = Q y* = 0 (3.69)
We will show how to use this property to find the modulusweighted centroid in the next example. With the ori
gin of the xy coordinates at the modulusweighted centroid, the material law for the resultants, eq. (3.62),
reduces to
N A * 0 0 w′ Nt
* I*
M x = E 0 0 I xx t
xy θ′ x – M x (3.70)
My * I*
0 I xy yy
θ′ y M yt
By locating the origin at the modulusweighted centroid we decouple the extensional response of the beam from
its bending response.
Lastly we write the normal stress σ z given by eq. (3.61) in terms of the resultants. Invert eq. (3.70)) and
solve for the extensional strain w′ , and curvatures θ′ x and θ′ y . to get
1
w′ = * ( N + N t ) (3.71)
E0 A
θ′ x * –I *
I yy t
1 xy M x + M x
= 
* I * – I * 2)
 (3.72)
θ′ y E 0 ( I xx yy xy * I*
– I xy M y + M yt
xx
Now substitute eq. (3.71) for w′ and eqs. (3.72) for θ′ x and θ′ y into eq. (3.61) to eliminate these terms in the
equation for σ z . The equation for the normal stress in the form
σ z = σ zm + σ zt (3.73)
where σ zm is the mechanical portion of normal stress and σ zt is the thermal portion of the normal stress. The for
mulas for these components are
* M – I * M )x
( I xx * M – I * M )y
( I yy
E y xy x x xy y
σ zm =  N + 
 +  (3.74)
E0 * *
( I xx I yy – I xy ) *2 * I * – I *2 )
( I xx yy xy
* M t – I * M t )x
( I xx * M t – I * M t )y
( I yy
E y xy x x xy y
σ zt =  N t + 
 + 
 – Eα∆T (3.75)
E0 * *
( I xx I yy – I xy ) *2 * I * – I *2 )
( I xx yy xy
In eqs. (3.74) and (3.75) the modulus E and coefficient of thermal expansion α are functions of x and y in gen
eral.
A beam of three materials is subjected to a positive bending moment M x only. The maximum tensile normal
stress is 35 ksi. Find the maximum compressive normal stress.
92 ThinWalled Structures
Extension, pure bending, and thermal effects for multimaterial beams
2in 1
Mx E 1 = 35msi
x
E 2 = 20msi
2in 2
E 3 = 5msi
y c*
y 1msi = 10 6 psi
2in 3
x
1in
Solution In this example we take the reference modulus E 0 = 10Msi , so that E 1 ⁄ E 0 = 3.5 , E 2 ⁄ E 0 = 2 , and
E 3 ⁄ E 0 = 0.5 . The modulus weighted area from eq. (3.63) is
3
E Ei
A* =
∫∫  d A =
E0 ∑ 
E
A
0
i = 3.5 × 2in 2 + 2 × 2in 2 + 0.5 × 2in 2 = 12in 2
A i=1
Note that the modulus weighted area is twice the geometric area. We choose the x  y system centered at the bot
tom of the beam as shown in Fig. 3.22. Since the y axis is an axis of symmetry, both in geometry and in mate
rial properties, the modulus weighted centroid lies on this axis. We need only to find the location on the y axis of
the modulus weighted centroid; i.e., y c* . Begin by calculating the modulus weighted first area moment about the
x axis. See eqs. (3.64). That is,
3
E Ei
Q x* =
∫∫  y d A =
E0 ∑ 
E
y A
0
i i = 3.5 × 5in × 2in 2 + 2 × 3in × 2in 2 + 0.5 × 1in × 2in 2
A i=1
so
Q x* = 48in 3
We now use the parallel axis theorem for the first area moment as given by eqs. (3.43), but generalized to the
multimaterial case to write
Hence
Q* 48in 3
y c* = *x = 2 = 4in
A 12in
Note that the modulus weighted centroid is located at the intersection of materials 1 and 2, which does not coin
ThinWalled Structures 93
Axial Normal Stress in Pure Bending and Extension
Now that the modulus weighted centroidal coordinates xy are located, the modulus weighted second area
moments are calculated. Again, the yaxis is an axis of symmetry, both in geometry and in material properties, so
* = 0 . Since
that the modulus weighted product area moment about the xy axes vanishes; i.e., I xy
* = 0 , the formula for the axial normal stress, eqs. (3.73) and (3.74), reduces to
N = M y = I xy
E Mx
σ z =  
*
y 2in ≤ y ≤ – 4in
E 0 I xx
3 3 3
E E E Ei
* =  y 2 d A = ∑ ∫∫ i y 2 d A = ∑ ∫∫ i y2dA = ∑  + y 2 A )i
I xx
∫∫
A
E0
i = 1 Ai
Eo
i=1
Eo
Ai
E
i=1
(I
o
xx
In achieving this result we used the fact that the (geometric) second area moment of the ith area element about
2 + y i2 A i , which is based on the composite body technique and parallel axis theorem.
the xaxis is
∫ ∫ y dA = I
Ai
xxi
1
* = 3.5 ×  1
I xx  × 1 × 2 3 + ( 1 ) 2 × 2 + 2 ×  × 1 × 2 3 + ( – 1 ) 2 × 2 +
12 12
1
0.5 ×  × 1 × 2 3 + ( – 3 ) 2 × 2 = 24in 4
12
Only material 1 is in tension for M x > 0 . So the axial normal stress is a maximum in material 1 at
y = 2in ;i.e., σ z = 35ksi Thus,
Mx
35ksi = 3.5 × 4 × 2in
24in
3
Hence M x = 120 ×10 lbin . The maximum compressive normal stress in material 2 is
E2 M x
 ( – 2in ) = 2 × 5000lb/in 3 × ( – 2in ) = – 20ksi
σ z =  
*
E 0 I xx
94 ThinWalled Structures
Extension, pure bending, and thermal effects for multimaterial beams
3
17, 500 lb/in × y 0 < y ≤ 2in
σ z = 10, 000 lb/in 3 × y – 2in < y < 0
2, 500 lb/in 3 × y – 4in ≤ y < – 2in
and this is plotted in Fig. 3.23. Note that the bending normal stress jumps at the material interfaces since the
modulus is discontinuous, but is linear in y within a material layer. The axial normal strain in terms of the kine
matic quantities w′ , θ x ′ , and θ y ′ is given by eq. (3.56). For this problem N = N t = 0 , so the w′ = 0 from eq.
(3.71); i.e., there is no axial extensional component to the strain. Also, M y = M yt = M xt = I xy
* = 0 , which
Mx 5000 lb/in 3
ε z = yθ x ′ = y 
* 6
 = ( 500 × 10 –6 in –1 )y
 = y  – 4in ≤ y ≤ 2in
E 0 I xx 10 ×10 lb/in 2
The maximum tensile strain is 1000 × 10 –6 in/in = 1000µε at y = 2 in, and the maximum compressive strain is
– 2000 × 10 –6 in/in = – 2000µε at y = 4 in. (The quantity µε is read as microstrain.) The strain is continuous in
the coordinate y as is shown in Fig. 3.23.
y y, in
y, in
2 2
2in 1 Mx > 0
x σ z, ksi ε z, µε
– 20 – 10 – 5 – 2000
35 0 1000
2in 2
–2 –2
2in 3
–4 –4
1in
Fig. 3.23 Distribution of normal stress and strain through the thickness for the multimaterial beam
ThinWalled Structures 95
Axial Normal Stress in Pure Bending and Extension
3.6 Problems
y, y 1.For the thinwalled Ysection shown at right, the
branch thickness t is much smaller that the branch
45° 45° length l.
4a C
x
3.Half of the cross section of a ship is shown on the
next page. Only the material that is effective in the
β
longitudinal bending is illustrated in the figure.
a neutral axis in the cross Determine the area A, location of the centroid y c ,
t section
and the second area moment about the xaxis (
I xx )for the full section. Use the tabular format for
the computations as given in Example 3.3. All plat
ing has a thickness t = 14 mm unless other wise noted. The descriptions of the numbered structural elements
shown in the figure are given in the table.
item # Description
1 outer bottom
2 Inner bottom
3 Center girder
4&5 Side girders
6 Bilge (curved portion)
7 Side plating
8 Second deck plating
9 & 11 Hatch side girders L500 × 400 × 25
10 Strength deck plating
96 ThinWalled Structures
Problems
4m
10
11
7
9m
8
9
x
C
5.5 m
yc
2
5 4 3
6
t/2 x
R=1m 1 3.5 m
6.5 m
L500 × 400 × 25
π
R A =  Rt
2R ⁄ π 2 500mm
C π 1 4 C x
t x I xx =  R 3 t  – 
2 2 π 2 139mm
400mm
A = 0.0225m 2
–4
I xx = 6.077 ×10 m4
ThinWalled Structures 97
Axial Normal Stress in Pure Bending and Extension
98 ThinWalled Structures
CHAPTER 4 Axial Force, Shear Force
and Bending Moment
Diagrams
The following three methods to construct equilibrium shear force and bending moment diagrams for beams are
described
• the method of sections
• the differential equation method, and
• the semigraphical approach.
In actual practice the distinction between these methods becomes blurred, because they may be used simul
taneously by the analyst. In the last section of this chapter the buoyancy force distribution on ships is described
so that the longitudinal bending response can be computed.
Consider a straight slender bar with uniform cross section, which has a length 3c, and is simply supported at
two locations as shown in Fig. 4.1. In a righthanded Cartesian coordinate system (x,y,z), take the zaxis is paral
lel to the length, the yaxis in the plane of the figure, and the xaxis perpendicular to the plane of the figure. The
origin is at the left end of the bar; 0 ≤ z ≤ 3c . The bar is in equilibrium subject to the external loads F and p y ( z )
which act in the zy plane. Neglect the weight of the bar relative to the loads F and p y ( z ) , as is frequently done
in structures where the applied loads are much greater than the weight of the structure. The load F is a point
force acting at the left end of the bar, and is replaced by its horizontal and vertical components Fz and Fy. The
ThinWalled Structures 99
Axial Force, Shear Force and Bending Moment Diagrams
F Fy py( z)
z
Fz
c 2c
Fig. 4.1 A slender bar simply supported at two locations and subjected to force F and
distributed load p y ( z ) .
load p y ( z ) is a distributed load and has units of force per unit length. It is assumed positive if it acts vertically
upward (positive ydirection), and negative if it acts downward. At a typical value for z we want to find the inter
nal axial force N(z), shear force Vy(z), and bending moment Mx(z). We write the internal actions as N(z), Vy(z),
and Mx(z), since they are mathematically functions of the coordinate z. The basis for their determination is equi
librium.
Freebody diagrams of the bar removed from its supports and by imagining the bar is cut at some value of z
are shown in Fig. 4.2. The internal actions N, Vy, and Mx are shown as well as the unknown support reactions Ay,
Bz, and By. Let us assume the distributed load p y ( z ) vanishes in this discussion. Internal actions N, Vy, and Mx
are shown in their assumed positive senses. A positive zface has its outward normal in the positive zdirection,
and a negative zface has its outward normal in the negative zdirection. That is, on a positive zface a positive
axial force N acts in a positive zdirection, a positive shear force Vy acts in the positive ydirection, and the posi
tive moment Mx acts clockwise, or as a vector in the positive xdirection by the righthand screw rule. By New
ton's third law on action/reaction, positive values of N, Vy, and Mx acting on a negative zface have a sense
opposite to their positive values on the positive zface. The sign convention for the internal forces and moments
needs be carefully followed.
The usual procedure to determine N(z), Vy(z), and Mx(z), is to first draw an overall freebody diagram of the
bar removed from its supports and find the unknown support reactions, and then section the bar at various zloca
tions to find N, Vy, and Mx. The reader should verify that the support reactions in Fig. 4.2 are A y = ( – 3 ⁄ 2 )F y ,
B z = F z , and B y = F y ⁄ 2 , where Fy and Fz are the known applied loads. Note that the force Ay has a sense
opposite to what was originally assumed.
The overall equilibrium freebody diagram of the bar is shown at the top of Fig. 4.3. The diagrams shown
from top to bottom directly below the overall freebody diagram are the axial force diagram, the shear force dia
gram, and the bending moment diagram, respectively. The axial force diagram is obtained by sectioning the bar
at any value of z, 0 < z < 3c, placing a positive internal force N on the cut faces, and then summing forces in the
zdirection for one of the two freebody diagrams. Thus, N(z) is a constant, for all z, 0 < z < 3c. In a similar man
ner one obtains Vy(z) and Mx(z). Note that the shear force has a discontinuity at z = c since a point force acts
there. It is necessary to consider freebody diagrams in two separate ranges of z to draw the shear force diagram;
0 < z < c, and c < z < 3c. The magnitude of the jump in the shear force is equal to the magnitude of the point
Fy
Fz Bz
Ay By
c 2c
overall FBD
Fy
Vy
Fz N Bz
z Mx Mx
Ay By
Vy
z 2c
Left and right FBD’s for cuts in the range 0 < z < c
Fig. 4.2 Free body diagrams (FBDs) of the slender bar with p y ( z ) = 0.
force: V y ( c + ) – V y ( c  ) = ( 3 ⁄ 2 )F y . The shear force is a piecewise constant for this problem. The bending
moment is piecewise linear; i.e., Mx(z) = z Fy, 0 < z < c, and Mx(z) = (3c  z)(Fy/2), c < z < 3c. The bending
moment is continuous at z = c, but has a discontinuity in slope M' x ( c + ) – M' x ( c  ) = ( 3 ⁄ 2 )F y , where
M' x = d M x ⁄ dz . As illustrated in Fig. 4.2, there are two freebody diagrams for each cut. Either one may be
used to find N, Vy, and Mx. If the left freebody diagram is used to find N, Vy, and Mx, then equilibrium of the
right freebody diagram will give the same values of N, Vy, and Mx. If it does not, there is either a math error, the
sign convention is violated, or overall equilibrium is in error. Sketching the axial force, shear force, and bending
moment diagrams by the method illustrated in this section is called the method of sections.
Fy Fy/2
Fz z
c 2c
3/2 Fy
N
Fz
0 z
Vy
Fy/2
0 z
 Fy Vy
N + N
Mx Mx Mx
Vy
0 z
 cFy
Fig. 4.3 Axial force N, shear force Vy, and bending moment Mx diagrams
for the slender bar with p y ( z ) = 0,
Consider a portion of a straight beam subjected to distributed load whose intensity is p y ( z ) as shown in Fig.
4.4. By convention p y ( z ) is positive upwards and negative downwards. A freebody diagram of a portion ∆z
long of the beam is shown in Fig. 4.5. The shear force and bending moment change with z, and so their values at
z + ∆z are different from their values at z. The distributed load acting on the segment ∆z is replaced by single
force of magnitude p y ∆z acting long a line of action given by z = z*, where z < z* < z + ∆z. Mathematically this
is permissible by the mean value theorem (for integrals) for continuous functions of a single variable, and from
this theorem we have
( z + ∆z )
1
p y = 
∆z ∫ p y ( ζ ) dζ
z
py( z)
y
Fig. 4.4 Distributed load intensity shown acting in the positive sense
py( z)
Vy + ∆Vy
Fig. 4.5 Mx
Vy Mx + ∆Mx
z
z + ∆z
p y ( z * )∆z
Vy + ∆Vy
Fig. 4.6
Mx
Vy Mx + ∆Mx
z
z*
z + ∆z
In the freebody diagram of Fig. 4.6 we sum forces vertically, divide by ∆z, and take the limit as ∆z → 0 to
get
dV y
= – py (4.1)
dz
Often it is more convenient to use an integrated form of eq. (4.1). Integrating it from z1 to z we obtain
∫
V y ( z ) = V y ( z 1 ) – p y ( ζ ) dζ (4.2)
z1
The integrated form is valid only if there are no point loads between z1 and z. If we sum moments at z in the free
body diagram, divide by ∆z, and take the limit as ∆z → 0 we get
dM x
= Vy (4.3)
dz
The integrated form of eq. (4.3) is
z
∫
M x ( z ) = M x ( z 1 ) + V y ( ζ ) dζ (4.4)
z1
which is valid if no point couples act between z1 and z. Equations (4.1) and (4.3) are the differential equations of
equilibrium for the beam. Equation (4.1) is valid at z if no point force acts there, and eq. (4.3) is valid at z if no
point couple acts there. Considering separately the equilibrium of a point force F0 and a point couple with
moment magnitude C0 acting at z = z0, as shown in Fig. 4.7, we obtain
F0
y C0
V y ( z 0+ )
z V y ( z 0 ) ε
M x ( z 0+ )
M x ( z 0 )
z0
Fig. 4.7 Point force and couple acting at z0 on an inifintesimal beam element
V y ( z 0+ ) – V y ( z 0 ) = – F 0 M x ( z 0+ ) – M x ( z 0 ) = – C 0 (4.5)
Distributed loads may be replaced by a resultant force acting at the center of pressure. This procedure is con
venient in many situations. For example, the air load distribution on a wing may be replaced by lift and drag
forces acting at the center of pressure. A segment of a beam from z = z1 to a typical value of z, z > z1, which has a
distributed load with intensity p y ( z ) acting on it is shown in Fig. 4.8. Using ζ as a dummy variable to measure
the axial position, the resultant force F y ( z ) is
F y(z) =
∫ p ( ζ ) dζ
y (4.6)
z1
py(z)
F y(z)
V y ( z1 ) V y(z) V y ( z1 ) V y(z)
M x ( z1 ) M x(z) M x ( z1 ) M x(z)
z1 z1
ζ
z p(z)
z z
Fig. 4.8 Resultant force at the center of pressure statically equivalent to a distributed load.
z p ( z )F y =
∫ ζ p ( ζ ) dζ
y (4.7)
z1
Both the resultant force F y ( z ) and center of pressure z p ( z ) are functions of z. Equations (4.6) and (4.7) are con
ditions of statical equivalence for the distributed load p y ( z ) .
Consider the cantilever wing with tip tank as shown in Fig. 4.9. Given the weight of the tip tank and its contents
z
p y ( z ) = p 0 
L
z
e
L
W
W, the distance e of the weight W from the wing tip, the wing span L, and the value of the distributed load inten
sity p 0 at the wing root, determine the shear force and bending moment along the span. The solution to this
problem is given by a Mathematica 4.0 program listed below.
1 2 3 4 5 6
ü Example 4.1
Shear force and bending moment diagrams for a cantilever wing with tip tank.
Vy = Vy0  ‡ py „ z
z2 p0
 ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ
Å + Vy0
2L
Mx = Mx0 + ‡ Vy „ z
z3 p0
Mx0  ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ
Å + z Vy0
6L
Boundary conditions at the wing tip, obtained from equilibrium of the tip tank, deter
mined the shear force Vy0 and moment Mx0 .
bc1 = HVy ê. z Ø 0L  W
bc2 = HMx ê. z Ø 0L  e W
W + Vy0
e W + Mx0
slv1 = Solve@bc1 == 0, Vy0 D
88Vy0 Ø W<<
Vy0 = Vy0 ê. slv1@@1DD
W
slv2 = Solve@bc2 == 0, Mx0 D
88Mx0 Ø e W<<
Mx0 = Mx0 ê. slv2@@1DD
eW
j Åz
je W + W z  ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ z
k 6L {
Plot the shear force and bending moment diagrams for the following parameter
values: L = 144 in, p0 = 70 lb/in, W = 500 lbs, and e = 6 in. (Plots labled p1 and
p2 have been suppressed using the DisplayFunction option.)
8z, 0, 144<,
PlotRange Ø 81000, 5000<,
PlotLabel Ø
StyleForm@"Shear force diagram",
"Section"D,
DisplayFunction > IdentityD
Ü Graphics Ü
8z, 0, 144<,
PlotLabel Ø
StyleForm@"Bending moment diagram",
"Section"D,
DisplayFunction > IdentityD
Ü Graphics Ü
Show@GraphicsArray@88p1<, 8p2<<DD
(The plots are are shown on the next page.)
1 2 3 4 5 6
The magnitude of the bending moment is largest at the wing root, and this vlaue is
important for wing structural design. Its value in lbin is
Mx ê. 8 L Ø 144, p0 Ø 70, W Ø 500, e Ø 6, z Ø 144<
166920
1 2 3 4 5 6
z,inches
20 40 60 80 100 120 140
1000
2000
3000
4000
5000
10000
z,inches
20 40 60 80 100 120 140
10000
20000
30000
40000
50000
Shear force and bending moment diagrams for the cantilever wing with tip tank
The shear force and bending moment at the wing tip are determined from equilibrium of the tip tank, which
gives Vy(0) = W and Mx(0) = eW. Note that eq. (4.1) shows that the slope on the shear diagram is equal to the
distributed load intensity. For example at z = 0, p y ( 0 ) = 0 , so that the slope of the shear diagram is zero at z = 0.
Similarly, the slope on the moment diagram d M x ⁄ dz is equal to the shear force as given by eq. (4.3). In particu
lar, at z = 45.36 inches the shear force is zero. Thus, in the bending moment diagram the moment is stationary at
z = 45.36 in (i.e., it has a horizontal slope), and Mx may be either a local maximum, minimum, or a value corre
sponding to horizontal inflection point. It is important to compute the largest magnitude of the bending moment,
and this is accomplished by checking the bending moments where Vy = 0, at the end points of the beam, and the
locations where the bending moment is discontinuous. Note that the maximum bending moment magnitude
occurs at the wing root, where M x = – 166920 lbin . The bending moment changes sign, and hence vanishes, at
z = 81.4 inches. In a plot of the beam deflection versus z, which is not shown above, the location z = 81.4 inches
is called an inflection point because the curvature is changing from concave down (positive Mx) to concave up
(negative Mx) as z increases through z = 81.4 inches.
EXAMPLE 4.2 The air load acting on a wing given as discrete data.
The problem statement and data for this example is taken from the aircraft structures text by Peery (1950). How
ever, the notation is changed to that of the this text, and the solution is given in terms of a Mathematica 3.0 pro
gram. Since the air load on the wing is given at discrete spanwise locations and not as a mathematical function, it
is useful to use Mathematica’s list manipulation capabilities to effect the solution. Before giving the problem
statement, we will discuss some aspects of list manipulations.
Lists provide a mechanism for representing arrays, vectors, matrices, and for grouping together objects such
as data, variables, or expressions. A list is a collection of objects whose symbols are enclosed in braces, {}, and
separated by commas, as in { item 1, item 2, item 3, …, item n } . It is usually more efficient to do operations on
lists rather than to do operations on individual items in the list. A function is applied separately to each element in
the list if it has the attribute “Listable”. For example, addition, multiplication, and the logarithm have the attribute
Listable, so that
{ 5, 8, 11 } + { 2, – 3, – 6 } = { 7, 5, 5 }
{ 5, 8, 11 }* { 2, – 3, – 6 } = { 10, – 24, – 66 }
Log [ { 5, 8, 11 } ] = { Log [ 5 ], Log [ 8 ] ], Log [ 11 ] ] }
That is, Listable functions in Mathematica are automatically distributed or “threaded” over lists that appear as its
arguments. The number of elements in a list is given by the builtin function Length [ ]; e.g.,
Length [ { 5, 8, 11 } ] = 3 . A summary of Mathematica’s builtin functions used for list manipulation is given in
the table below.
Function Description
Range [min, max, step] Generates the list {min, .., max} using step (arithmetic progression)
Table [expr, {imax}] Generates a list of imax copies of expr (more general)
Array [s, dim] Generates a list of length dim with elements s[i]
Sort [list] Sorts elements of list into canonical order
Function Description
Reverse [list] Reverses elements in list
RotateLeft [ list, n] Cycles the elements n positions to the left
RotateRight [ list,n] Cycles the elements n positions to the right
Permutations [list] Generates a list of all possible permutations of the elements of list
Drop [list, n] Drops the first n elements from list
Take [list, n] Takes the first n elements from list
First [list] Give the first element of list
Last [list] Gives the last element of list
list [[n]] or Part [list, n] Gives the nth element
Rest [list] Returns all but the first element of list
Select [list, crit] Picks out elements in list which meet the criterion of crit
Append [list, elem] Returns a list with elem appended to the end of list
AppendTo [list, elem] Changes list by appending elem to the end
Prepend [list, elem] Returns a list with elem added to the from of list
PrependTo [list, elem] Changes list by adding elem to the front
Insert [list, elem, n] Inserts elem at position n in list
Length [list] Gives the number of elements in list
Dimensions [list] Gives the dimensions of a list or expression
Complement [ list1, list2, ... ] Gives the complement, i.e., those elements in list1 but not in list 2, ...
Intersection [ list1, list2, ... ] Gives a sorted list of all the elements common to all list1, list2, ...
Union [list1, list2, ... ] Gives a sorted list of the distinct elements
Join [list1, list2, ... ] Joins or concatenates lists together
Partition [list, n] Partition list into sublists of length n
Flatten [list] Flattens out nested lists, i.e., eliminates nested lists
Transpose [list] Transpose
Apply [f, list] Replaces the head of list with f
Map [f,list] Applies f to each element in list
Listable An attribute, if set, automatically maps a functions onto a list
ColumnForm[list] Prints list as a column
MatrixForm[ list] Prints elements in list in a regular array
Problem statement: The aerodynamic loads on an airplane wing cannot be represented by a simple equa
tion. The load per inch of span, p y ( z ) = p ( z ) , of the airplane wing shown in Fig. 4.10is tabulated in column
two of the Table printed at line “Out[14]” in the Mathematica program below. Find the shear force and bending
moment diagrams for the wing.
Solution: The values of the shear force and bending moment at various points along the wing are calculated
in the Table (see Out[14] in the code). The points are called stations and are designated by their distances from
110 ThinWalled Structures
Differential equation method
Fig. 4.10
the centerline of the airplane, as shown in Fig. 4.10. These distances are measured along the wing rather than
horizontally, since the air loads are perpendicular to the wing. The distances between stations, ∆z , are computed
as a list in the code. The value of the shear at any point is obtained as the area under the load curve from that
point out to the wing tip. The load curve is assumed to be a series of straight lines between the known points, and
the area is obtained as the sum of the areas of the trapezoids. The area of the trapezoids are obtained as the prod
uct of the average height p ave and the base ∆z . The change in the shear ∆V y between two stations is equal to
the area of the load curve between the stations. The shear V y is then obtained by summation of the ∆V y values.
The change in the bending moment ∆M x between two stations is equal to the area under the shear curve. This
area is also assumed trapezoidal and is obtained by multiplying the sum of the shears at the adjacent stations by
onehalf the distance between the stations. The bending moments are obtained by a summation of the ∆M x val
ues. Plots of the air load, shear force, and bending moment distributions are shown at the end of the Mathematica
program
Example 4.2: Numerical quadrature for the shear force and bending moment in a wing
(Peery, 1950, pp. 107109)
In[1]:= Off@General::spell1D
Input the airload intensity at each zstation and each zstation coordinate as two separate lists. Dimensional
units: zlist, inches; plist, lb/in.
In[2]:= z = 80, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 140, 160, 180,
p = 8125, 123, 120, 116, 111, 105, 98, 89, 80, 71,
200, 220, 225<;
1. 2 3 4 5 6 7
The trapezoidal rule of numerical integration is used to compute the change in the shear force over each
interval from eq. (4.2). A list of DVy  values is computed by a direct multiplication of lists Dz and pave .
In[6]:= Head@DVy D
Out[6]= List
Out[7]= 21107.5
Vy HiL = ⁄ij=1 DVy H jL + Vy0 . We use the Table function to generate a list of the shear force values at each
The shear force at station i is the the partial sum of the of the DVy  values over the intevals from 1 to i; i.e.,
station.
Add the value of the shear force at the root to the beginning of this list in order to have the shear force at each
zi  station, including the root.
1 2 3 4 5 6
Compute the average force in each interval from the list of shear force values.
The change in the bending moment is computed from eq. (4.4) using the trapezoidal rule of numerical
integration.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Out[14]//TableForm=
Plots of the airload, shear force, and bending moment distributions. (Intermediate plots have been suppressed.)
PlotStyle Ø 8PointSize@0.02D<,
In[15]:= p11 = ListPlot@Transpose@8z, p<D,
100
80
60
40
20
z, in.
50 100 150 200
lb Shear force
20000
15000
10000
5000
z, in.
50 100 150 200
500000
6
1µ10
6
1.5µ10
6
2µ10
Consider a barge at rest in still water with a uniform immersed cross section, and subjected to the symmetrical
loads shown in Fig. 4.11. This is an example of a structure with no boundary supports, and is typical of aero
5m 5m 5m 5m
15kN (total) 15kN (total)
10kN
Fig. 4.11 Uniform section barge in still water with symmetric load.
space and ocean vehicle structures. We wish to sketch the shear force and bending moment diagrams for the
barge. In this example there is a distributed load acting on the barge due to buoyancy forces produced by displac
ing the water. Let p b represent the distributed load intensity due to buoyancy, and p b is a constant along the
barge because the immersed cross section is uniform and the water is still.
Solution: A semigraphical method is used to sketch the shear force and bending moment diagrams. In this
approach we first sketch the distributive load p y ( z ) , then the shear force Vy(z), and finally the bending moment
Mx(z). Equations (4.1) and (4.3) are used to note that the slope of shear diagram at z is the negative of the distrib
uted load intensity at z, and the slope of the moment diagram at z is the shear force at z. In addition, eqs. (4.2) and
(4.4) set at z = z2 give
z2
∫
V y ( z 2 ) – V y ( z 1 ) = – p y ( z ) dz (4.8)
z1
z2
M x ( z2 ) – M x ( z1 ) =
∫ V ( z ) dz
y (4.9)
z1
Equation (4.8) is interpreted in a graphical sense to mean that the difference in the shear force between z2
and z1 is the area under the distributed loading diagram from z1 to z2. This is not geometrical area. The area
between the p y ( z ) curve and the zaxis has units of force, and may be positive, zero, or negative. Similarly eq.
(4.9) is interpreted to mean the difference in the bending moment is the area under the shear force diagram.
Vertical equilibrium of the entire barge requires the buoyant upthrust equals 40kN, so that p b = ( 2kN ) ⁄ m .
The total distributed load intensity is the difference between p b and the magnitude of the downward acting
applied loading intensity. The distributed loading intensity diagram is constructed in this manner as shown in Fig.
4.13.
py
10 kN
2
kN/m 15
0 z, m
5 10 20
1
z, m
5 10 15 20
2
4
17.5
15
12.5
10
7.5
5
2.5
z, m
5 10 15 20
Fig. 4.12 Shear force and bending moment diagrams for the barge in still water
The point force of 10kN acting at z = 10m is shown schematically in the p y ( z ) diagram as a downward
pointing arrow. Actually, p y → – ∞ as z → 10m , because a point force is a finite load acting over zero length.
Point forces are idealizations to actual loads and introduce discontinuities in the mathematical descriptions of
some of the dependent variables. The reader should verify the distributive loading intensity diagram of Fig.
4.13.The shear force diagram is drawn below the loading intensity diagram in Fig. 4.13. Equilibrium at z = 0
requires Vy(0) = 0, and the slope dVy/dz at z = 0 is equal to 1kN/m. The slope is constant between 0 < z < 5m ,
thus Vy(z) is a straight line in this range of z. The difference in the shear force between z = 5m and z = 0 is equal
to the negative of the area under the p y ( z ) curve which is 5kN. Thus Vy(5) = 5kN since Vy(0) = 0. At z = 5+m the
loading intensity jumps to +2kN/m. The slope of the shear force jumps from 1kN/m to 2kN/m at z = 5m, but the
shear force is itself continuous. The difference Vy(10)  Vy(5) is equal to the negative of the area between the
p y ( z ) curve and the zaxis between z = 5m and z = 10m. Thus Vy(10)  Vy(5) = 10kN, so Vy(10) = 5kN. Note
the shear force is zero at z = 7.5m. At z = 10m the point force of 10kN acts. According to the first of eqs. (4.5)
Vy(10+)  Vy(10) = 10kN, so that Vy(10+) = 5kN. The slope of the shear at z = 10m is +2kN/m, and remains con
stant until z = 15m. The difference Vy(15)  Vy(10+) = 10kN, so that Vy(15) = 5kN. Finally, the slope changes to
1kN/m at z = 15+m and remains constant in the range 15 < z < 20. The difference Vy(20)  Vy(15) = 5kN, so that
Vy(20) = 0. Checking vertical equilibrium at z = 20m verifies that Vy(20) should be zero.
Moment equilibrium at z = 0 shows Mx(0) = 0. The slope of Mx at z = 0 is equal to the shear force at z= 0.
Hence ( d M x ) ⁄ ( dz ) = 0 at z = 0, as shown in Fig. 4.13. The slope on the moment diagram increases linearly
from zero at z = 0 to 5kN at z = 5m. Thus Mx(z) is parabolic from z= 0 to z = 5. The difference Mx(5)  Mx(0) is
equal to the area under shear diagram from z = 0 to z = 5m. Hence, Mx(5)  Mx(0) = 12.5 kNm, and Mx(5) = 12.5
kNm since Mx(0) = 0. From z = 5 to z = 7.5 the slope of the moment decreases from 5kN to zero. At z = 7.5, Mx
is a local maximum with a magnitude of 18.75 kNm. The slope of Mx(z) for 7.5 < z < 10 is negative, decreasing
linearly from zero to 5kN. The difference Mx(10)  Mx(7.5) = 6.25 kNm, so that Mx(10) = 12.50 kNm. The
slope of Mx(z) at z = 10m jumps from a 5kN to a +5kN as shown in Fig. 4.13, but the moment itself is continu
ous. The bending moment diagram in the range 10 < z < 20 is completed in a manner similar to the description of
its construction in the range 0 < z < 10.
In this example the shear force diagram is antisymmetric about z = 10m and the bending moment is symmet
ric about z = 10m. This follows from the symmetrical loading on the barge and equilibrium eqs. (4.1) and (4.3).
A more detailed account of these conditions on the longitudinal bending of the ship is given by Muckle
(1967) and Zubaly (1996), and here we only summarize the basic ideas.
A ship in still water is shown in Fig. 4.13, and a section between z and z + dz is shown in Fig. 4.14.
Fig. 4.13
A ( z )dz
dF b
Fig. 4.14
Archimedes' principle asserts that the buoyant upthrust is equal to the weight of the fluid displaced. Let A(z)
denote the submerged cross section at z, and let γ denote the specific weight (force per volume) of the fluid. The
differential buoyancy force dFb acting on the ship over a differential length dz is
dF b = γA ( z )dz (4.10)
Consequently, the buoyant upthrust per unit ship length, which we designate p b , is equal to γA(z); i.e.,
dF
p b = b = γA ( z ) (4.11)
dz
A curve of p b for a ship as well as the weight per unit length is shown in Fig. 4.15. Overall equilibrium requires
weight/length
buoyancy/length
Fig. 4.15
the area under these curves to have the same magnitude. If the submerged cross section is uniform in z, as is the
case for the barge in Example 4.3, the distribution of the buoyancy per unit length p b is a constant.
At sea a ship is subjected to waves, and this alters the buoyancy distribution. For longitudinal bending of the
ship two extreme static conditions are assumed: sagging and hogging. In each condition, the length of the wave is
assumed to be the length of the ship. This is an “accepted” assumption for the worst buoyancy distribution caus
ing the most severe bending of the ship.
The sagging condition is shown in Fig. 4.16. (Also see Fig. 1.3 on page 5.) The wave crests are at the bow
and stern, and the wave trough is amidships. A schematic of the buoyancy per unit length is shown below the ship
in Fig. 4.16. The immersed cross section is the largest at or near the wave crests, and is least near the trough. The
intensity of the buoyancy distribution reflects this. In this condition the deck sags and is in compression while the
bottom is in tension. The worst location to concentrate the cargo in the ship is amidships, as this will result in the
largest bending moment.
concentrated weight
pb
The hogging condition is depicted in Fig. 4.17. Here the wave troughs are at bow and stern, and the crest is
amidships. The immersed cross section is greatest near amidships and is least near bow and stern. The distribu
tion of the buoyancy per unit length p b , shown in Fig. 4.17, reflects this situation. In hogging the deck is in ten
sion and the bottom is in compression. The worst possible locations to concentrate cargo is fore and aft, as this
will produce the greatest bending moment in the ship.
concentrated weights
pb
4.5 References
Blachman, N.R., 1992, Mathematica: A Practical Approach, Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey,
p. 133.
Muckle, W., 1967, Strength of Ship’s Structures, Edward Arnold Ltd., London, pp. 2769.
Peery, D.J., 1950, Aircraft Structures, McGrawHill, New York, pp. 107108.
Zubaly, R.M., 1996, Applied Naval Architecture, The Society of Naval Architects and Marine Engineers,
Cornell Maritime Press, Inc., Centreville, Maryland, pp. 195237.
4.6 Problems
2L
1. The cantilever wing is subjected to a distributed air load p y ( z ) =  1 – ( z ) 2 , where the total lift (2
πz max
wings) L = 20, 000lbs at cruise, wing length z max = 32.5 ft., and z = z ⁄ z max . Also, the wing supports an
engine weighing 1000 lbs. Plot the loading diagram, shear force diagram V y ( z ) , and bending moment diagram
M x ( z ) as functions of z for 0 ≤ z ≤ 32.5 ft. Partial answer: V y ( 0 ) = 9, 000 lb. and M x ( 0 ) = – 131934 lbft.
y
py( z)
py Vy
z
Mx Vy
+ Mx
32.5 ft.
fuselage
2. A proposed solar airplane called Centurion is being designed to achieve semiperpetual flight (Aviation
Week & Space Technology, May 4, 1998, p.54). Centurion is a flying wing with a span of 206 ft., an 8ft. chord,
and no taper or sweep. The wing has five sections, one center, two midspan, and two tips. It is supported by four
landing pods. The tip sections have a dihedral to assist in turning and washout twist to prevent tip stall. The
empty weight is predicted to be 1,105 lb., comprising 630 lb. for structure, 160 lb. for engines and propellers, 150
lb. for avionics, 75 lbs for batteries, 20 lb. of miscellaneous and 70 lb. for 7% growth. The aircraft should be able
to take a 100 lb payload to 100,000 ft. It is powered by 14 electric motors producing a maximum of 2 hp. each.
Assume the following: The spanwise airload distribution acting on the wing is as given in problem 1. Each
engine is modeled as a concentrated weight acting its location on the wing. The payload, avionics, batteries, etc.,
lumped are together as a concentrated load at the center, and that the structural weight is uniformly distributed
along the span. For steady level flight, determine the shear force and bending moment diagrams from the center
line of the wing to its tip, and show them in a sketch. Label significant points. The front view of half of the Cen
turion is shown below.
z
z1 4.0 ft.
z2 12.0 ft. z1
z3 19.2 ft. z2
z4 32.7 ft. z3
z4
z5 46.3 ft. z5
z6 60.0 ft. z6
z7 67.1 ft. z7
z8
z8 80.6 ft.
z9
z9 93.4 ft. z 10
z10 103.0 ft. Centerline
3. The barge shown below has a uniform cross section along its length and is subjected to a uniformly distrib
uted load of intensity p y ( z ) = – P , in which P has dimensional units of force/length. Also it is subjected to
z
buoyancy for the extreme hogging condition py( z) = P 1 – cos π  . Draw the shear force,
buoyancy L
z
L L
waterline
4. A barge has a plan view as shown. All waterplanes are identical. Cargo is loaded evenly in the four rectangu
lar holds as shown. Neglecting the weight of the barge itself, construct curves of weight, buoyancy, load, shear,
and bending moment for the loaded barge in still sea water. Label the values of each curve at each bulkhead, and
identify the maximum shear and bending moment. (Zubaly, 1996)
40 ft 40 ft 40 ft 40 ft 40 ft 40 ft
5. A barge of uniform rectangular construction has a length of 30m, breadth of 10m, depth of 5m, floats at an
even keel in fresh water at a draft of 2m when unloaded. The barge is transversely divided into three equal com
partments. These compartments are uniformly loaded as follows:
No. 1 hold, 200 tonne; No. 2 hold, 155 tonne; No. 3 hold, 245 tonne
(Note: one metric ton, or tonne, is equal to 1000 kg, and the mass density of fresh water is 1 tonne/m3)
You will plot the loading intensity diagram, shear force diagram, and the bending moment diagram for the
loaded barge in a column format. Do not neglect the weight of the barge itself.
a) Since the moments of the weight about amidships are not equal for the loaded barge, the barge trims.
Assume the trim angle is small. Show from overall equilibrium that the draft at z = 0 is d 0 = 3.7 m , and
that the draft at z = L = 30m is d L = 4.3m
b) Plot the loading intensity diagram, p y ( z ) , where the loading intensity is in N/m, Newton/meter.
(The specific weight in N/m3 is g times the mass density in kg/m3. If for simplicity g is taken as 10
(instead of 9.8) then specific weight of fresh water is 10m/sec 2 × 1000kg/m 3 = 10, 000N/m 3 .)
c) Determine the shear force, and plot it directly below the loading intensity diagram. Note; the dimen
sional unit of the shear force is N, or Newtons.
d) Determine the bending moment, and plot it directly below the shear diagram. Note; the dimensional
units of the bending moment are Nm, or Newtonmeters.
trim angle
z
5m
2m
d0 200t 245t dL
30m 155t
unloaded loaded
The engineering theory is known from actual practice, and from the few exact elasticity solutions available,
to provide reasonable estimates for long slender beams. As a general guide, the length of the beam should be
greater than ten times the largest crosssectional dimension for the engineering theory to be applicable.
In the 5.2 we discuss the governing boundary value problem for the displacements of a beam subject to
transverse loads. Following this, complementary virtual work and complementary strain energy equations for
beam bending are derived. The complementary energy method leads to the generalized form of Castigliano’s sec
ond theorem for beams. Application of Castigliano’s second theorem to compute beam displacements and rota
tions at discrete points is illustrated in several examples.
Equilibrium Let p x ( z ) and p y ( z ) , denote the lateral load intensities (F/L) in the xdirection and ydirection,
respectively, acting on the beam. These external load intensities are defined positive if they act in their respective
positive coordinate directions as shown in Fig. 5.1. Also shown in the figure, are the positive shear forces, V x
py y, v
Vy
px x, u
Vx
z
Mx
My
and V y , and the positive bending moments, M x and M y , acting on the positive zface of the beam. Consider a
free body diagram of a differential element of the beam dzlong obtained by cutting the beam parallel to the xy
plane at axial locations z and z + dz. Equilibrium conditions for bending in the yz plane involve the sum of
forces in the ydirection and sum of moments about the xaxis of the differential element. In the limit as dz → 0 ,
the sum of forces leads to
dV
y + p y = 0 (5.1)
dz
and the sum of the moments leads to
dMx
 – V y = 0 (5.2)
dz
Equations (5.1) and (5.2) were derived in Chapter 2 as eqs. (2.1) and (2.3), respectively. Equilibrium conditions
for bending in the xz plane involves the sum of forces in the xdirection and sum of moments about the yaxis of
the differential element. In the limit as dz → 0 , the sum of forces in the xdirection leads to
dV x
 + p x = 0 (5.3)
dz
and the sum of moments about the negative ydirection leads to
dMy
 – V x = 0 (5.4)
dz
Differentiating eq. (5.2) with respect to z, and then substituting eq. (5.1) into this result for the derivative of the
shear force gives
2
d Mx
= – py( z) (5.5)
dz2
Similarly, differentiating eq. (5.4) with respect to z, and then substituting eq. (5.3) into this result for the deriva
tive of the shear force gives
2
d My
= – px(z) (5.6)
dz2
Straindisplacement The normal strain of line elements parallel to the zaxis in the undeformed beam is deter
mined in Section 3.2, and is given by eq. (3.15) on p. 74 . Repeating this result we have
dθ y dθ x
ε z = x  + y  (5.7)
dz dz
in which the rotation of the projection of the zcurve into the yz plane (Fig. 3.9) is
dv
θ x = –  (5.8)
dz
and the rotation of the projection of the zcurve into the xz plane is
du
θ y = –  (5.9)
dz
These rotations are depicted in Fig. 3.9 on page 74. In eq. (5.8) the displacement component of the material
points on the zaxis in the ydirection is denoted by function v(z), and in eq. (5.9) the displacement in the xdirec
tion is denoted by function u(z). The derivatives of the rotations in eq. (5.7) are the curvature components of the
projections of the zcurve onto the xz and yz coordinate planes. Combining eqs. (5.7) to (5.9), we get
2 2
d u d v
ε z = x – 2 + y – 2 (5.10)
dz dz
Material law For a linear elastic, isotropic material the normal stressstrain relation is σ z = Eε z , where E is the
modulus of elasticity of the material. The normal strain distribution given in eq. (5.7) can be substituted into this
material law to get the normal stress distribution over the cross section due to bending. For a beam made of a
homogenous material, it was shown in eq. (3.25) on p. 77 that statical equivalence of the normal stress distribu
tion to the bending moments leads to
Mx I xx I xy θ′ x
= E (5.11)
My I xy I yy θ′ y
where Ixx, Iyy, and Ixy are the second area moments about the centroidal xy coordinates in the cross section, and
where the prime denotes an ordinary derivative with respect to z. The inverse of eq. (5.11) is
θ′ x 1 I yy – I xy M x
= 
2 )
(5.12)
θ′ y E ( I xx I yy – I xy – I xy I xx M y
Now substitute the rotationdisplacement relations, eqs. (5.8) and (5.9), into the material law, eq. (5.11), and
in turn substitute the moments from this result into equilibrium eqs. (5.5) and (5.6) to get
2 2 2 2
d d v d d u
2
EI xx 2 + 2
EI xy 2 = p y ( z ) 0<z<L (5.13)
dz dz dz dz
2 2 2 2
d d v d d u
2
EI xy 2 + 2
EI yy 2 = p x ( z ) 0<z<L (5.14)
dz dz dz dz
Equations (5.13) and (5.14) are the governing ordinary differential equations for the displacement functions u(z)
and v(z) in the open interval 0 < z < L , where L is the length of the beam. These equations are coupled in the
sense that u(z) and v(z) appear in both equations if the product area moment Ixy is nonzero. If the product area
moment is zero, then eq. (5.13) governs function v(z) alone and eq. (5.14) governs function u(z) alone. If the
bending stiffness terms EI xx, EI yy , and EI xy are independent of coordinate z, then the governing equations
reduce to
4 4
dv du
EI xx 4 + EI xy 4 = p y 0<z<L (5.15)
dz dz
4 4
dv du
EI xy + EI yy 4 = p x 0<z<L (5.16)
dz4 dz
The governing ordinary differential equations (5.15) and (5.16)are fourth order in each displacement func
tion, which means that their solution will contain four arbitrary constants for each displacement function. These
constants are determined from the boundary conditions at z = 0 and z = L. Boundary conditions specify how the
beam is supported at each end. For bending in the yz, plane specify at z = 0 and z = L
a) either displacement v or shear force V y , but not both
The particular choices for the socalled standard boundary conditions for bending in the yz plane are given in
Fig. 5.2. Other, more complex, boundary conditions exist in practice.
y, v, V y
θ x, M x 2 2
d v d u
z v = 0 M x = EI xx – + EI xy – = 0
2
dz d z 2
(1) simple support
z v = 0 θ x = – v′ = 0
(2) clamped
2 2
d d v d u
V y =  EI xx – + EI xy – = 0
dz 2
dz d z 2
(3) free z 2 2
d v d u
M x = EI xx – + EI xy – = 0
d z 2 d z 2
2 2
z d d v d u
(4) free in y V y =  EI xx – + EI xy – = 0 θx = 0
dz 2
dz d z 2
clamped about x
Fig. 5.2 Standard boundary conditions for bending in the yz plane.
The socalled standard boundary conditions for bending in the xz plane are shown in Fig. 5.3.
x , u, V x
θ y, M y 2 2
d v d u
z u = 0 M y = EI xy – + EI yy – = 0
2
d z d z 2
(1) simple support
z u = 0 θ y = – u′ = 0
(2) clamped
2 2
d d v d u
x V x =  EI xy – + EI yy – = 0
dz d z 2
d z 2
(3) free z
2 2
d v d u
M y = EI xy – + EI yy – = 0
2
dz d z 2
2 2
(4) free in x z d d v d u
V x =  EI xy – + EI yy – = 0 θy = 0
clamped about y dz 2
dz d z 2
Fig. 5.3 Standard boundary conditions for bending in the xz plane.
It is possible to decouple the displacements in the governing differential equations, but the problem may not
totally decouple because the boundary conditions can involve both displacements. To get the decoupling of the
differential equations, consider the case were the bending stiffnesses are uniform in the zcoordinate. Substitute
the rotationdisplacement relations, eqs. (5.8) and (5.9), into the inverse form of the material law, eq. (5.12), to
get
1 1
 – 
– v″ = ER yy ER xy M x
(5.17)
– u″ 1 1 My
–  
ER xy ER xx
I xx I yy – I xy 2 I xx I yy – I xy 2 I xx I yy – I xy 2
R xx =  R yy =  R xy =  (5.18)
I xx I yy I xy
Now differentiate eqs.(5.17) twice with respect to z, and substitute eqs. (5.5) and (5.6) into this result for the sec
ond derivatives of the moments to get
4
dv py( z) px( z)
4
= 
 –  0<z<L (5.19)
dz ER yy ER xy
4
du py( z) px( z)
4
= – 
 +  0<z<L (5.20)
dz ER xy ER xx
The uniform beam with a zee cross section is subjected to a uniformly distributed load of intensity p 0 in the pos
itive ycoordinate direction as shown in Fig. 5.4. The beam is clamped in both the yz plane and the xz plane at z
= 0. At z = L the beam is simply supported in the yz plane and clamped in the xz plane. (The mathematical con
ditions of support at z = L approximate a door butt hinge with the hinge axis parallel to the xdirection.) The sec
8 2
ond area moments for the cross section are I xx =  a 3 t , I yy =  a 3 t , and I xy = – a 3 t , where dimension a is as
3 3
shown in the figure and t denotes the wall thickness. Determine the displacements u ( z ) and v ( z ) , and the bend
ing moments Mx(z) and My(z).
y,v x,u y
p0
a
a x
z z
a
L L
a
Solution For this cross section the second area moment ratios defined by eqs. (5.18) are
7 7 7
R xx =  a 3 t R yy =  a 3 t R xy = –  a 3 t
24 6 9
The governing equation for bending in the yz plane is obtained from eq. (5.19) as
4
dv p0
4
= 
 0<z<L (5.21)
dz ER yy
and the boundary conditions are
v(0) = 0 (5.22)
θ x ( 0 ) = – v′ ( 0 ) = 0 (5.23)
v( L) = 0 (5.24)
M x ( L ) = EI xx ( – v″ ) + EI xy ( – u″ ) = 0 (5.25)
z=L
Note that boundary condition (5.25) requires that the displacement response u(z) be known. The governing equa
tion for bending in the xz plane is obtained from eq. (5.20) as
4
du p0
4
= – 
 0<z<L (5.26)
dz ER xy
and the boundary conditions are
u = u′ = 0 at z = 0 and z = L (5.27)
Note the boundary value problem for u(z) given by eqs. (5.26) and (5.27) is independent of the displacement
response v(z). Thus, we can solve eqs. (5.26) and (5.27) independent of the solution of eqs. (5.21) to (5.25). The
general solution to eq. (5.26) is
p0 z 4 z3 z2
u = –  + c 1  + c 2  + c 3 z + c 4
ER xy 24 6 2
where c1,..., c4 are arbitrary constants. The boundary conditions, eq. (5.27) at z = 0 require that constants c3 = c4
= 0. The boundary conditions at z = L lead to
L3 L2 p0 L 4
( u ( L ) = 0 ) → c 1 + c 2 = 

6 2 24ER xy
L2 po L 3
( u′ ( L ) = 0 ) → c 1 + Lc 2 = 

2 6ER xy
p0 L p0 L 2
c 1 = 
 c 2 = – 

2ER xy 12ER xy
3 p0 2
 z ( L – z )2
u ( z ) =  (5.28)
56Ea 3 t
where c5,..., c8 are arbitrary constants. Satisfaction of boundary conditions (5.22) and (5.23) requires c7 = c8 = 0.
Boundary condition (5.25)) can be rewritten as
R xx
v″ ( L ) +  u″ ( L ) = 0
R xy
Substituting for v(z) and u(z), eq. (5.28), this boundary condition leads to
p 0 L 2 R xx p 0 L 2
Lc 5 + c 6 = 
2
 – 
12ER xy 2ER yy
L3 L2 p0 L 4
c 5 + c 6 = – 

6 2 24ER yy
L ( – 5R xy 2 + R R )p L 2 ( 3R xy 2 – R R )p
xx yy 0 xx yy 0
c 5 = 
2 R
 c 6 = 
2 R

8ER xy yy 24ER xy yy
The bending moments are determined from the momentcurvature relations given by eqs. eq. (5.11). Substi
tuting the solutions from eqs. (5.28) and (5.29) into these momentcurvature relations gives
p0
M x =  ( – L 2 + 5Lz – 4z 2 )
8
p0 L
M y =  ( L – 3z )
64
The bending moment diagrams for Mx and My are shown in Fig. 5.6. Note that the moment for bending in the y
z plane, or Mx, is larger than the moment for bending in the xz plane, or My. Moment My would vanish if
I xy = 0 .
Ea3 t vêp0 L4
2.5
2
1.5
1
0.5
zêL
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
Ea3 t uêp0 L4
0.003
0.0025
0.002
0.0015
0.001
0.0005
zêL
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
Mx êp0 L2
0.05
zêL
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
0.05
0.1
My êp0 L2
0.01
zêL
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
0.01
0.02
0.03
Fig. 5.6 Bending moment diagrams for example 4.1
Fig. 5.6 Bending moment diagrams for the unsymmetrical section beam.
Fi 5 6 B di t di f l 41
EXAMPLE 5.2 Contact between two cantilever beams.
Consider two symmetrical section beams, one resting on top of the other, both clamped to a wall at z = 0.
The top beam is twice as long as the bottom beam, and the top beam is subjected to a downward force P at its tip.
Both beams have the same bending stiffness EIxx, which we abbreviate as EI here. See Fig. 5.7. Determine the
displacements due to bending for both beams assuming that they contact only at the tip of the shorter beam. Also
determine the bending moments and shear forces in each beam.
Solution Since the product area moment for each beam is zero, and neither beam is subjected to loads in the x
direction, the response for each is bending in the yz plane. Also, the distributed load intensity p y ( z ) is zero for
each beam, because we have assumed that the contact between the two beams occurs only at one point. The gov
erning equation for the displacement of the top beam is
y, v
z P
L/2 L/2
P
R
Fig. 5.7 Two cantilever beams in contact with
each other.
4
dv L L
= 0 0 < z <   < z < L
dz4 2 2
Consequently, the displacement function in the top beam is
z3 z2 L
v ( z ) = v 11 ( z ) = c 1  + c 2  + c 3 z + c 4 0 ≤ z ≤  (5.30)
6 2 2
z3 z2 L
v ( z ) = v 12 ( z ) = c 5  + c 6  + c 7 z + c 8  ≤ z ≤ L (5.31)
6 2 2
The boundary conditions are
v ( 0 ) = v′ ( 0 ) = 0 M x ( L ) = – EIv″ ( L ) = 0 V y ( L ) = – EIv′′′ ( L ) = – P (5.32)
and the conditions of continuity of displacement, rotation, and bending moment are
L
v 11 = v 12 v′ 11 = v′ 12 v″ 11 = v″ 12 at z =  (5.33)
2
There is a jump in the shear force at z = L/2 due to contact with the lower beam given by
z3 z2 L
v ( z ) = v 2 ( z ) = c 9  + c 10  + c 11 z + c 12 0 ≤ z ≤  (5.35)
6 2 2
The boundary conditions for the lower beam are
L L L L
v ( 0 ) = v′ ( 0 ) = 0 M x  = – EIv″  = 0 V y  = – EIv′′′  = – R (5.36)
2 2 2 2
L L
v 11  = v 2  (5.37)
2 2
The unknown reaction force R can be eliminated between eq. (5.34) and the third of eqs. (5.36) to get
v′′′ 11 – v′′′ 12 + v″′ 2 = 0 (5.38)
L
z = 
2
For displacement v11, eq. (5.30), to satisfy the first two clamped boundary conditions of eqs. (5.32) constants
c4 = c3 = 0. For displacement v12, eq. (5.31), to satisfy the last two boundary conditions of eqs.(5.32) constants
c5 = P/EI and c6 = L P/EI. For the displacement of the lower beam v2, eq. (5.35), to satisfy the first two clamped
end conditions of eqs. (5.36) constants c11 = c12 =0. For v2 to satisfy the zero moment condition, third of eqs.
(5.36), constant c10 =  c9 L/2. Thus, to this point the displacements are
z3 z2 P LP
v 11 = c 1  + c 2  v 12 = z 3 – z 2 + c 7 z + c 8 (5.39)
6 2 6EI 2EI
z 3 Lz 2
v 2 = c 9  –  (5.40)
6 4
Substitute both of eqs. (5.39) into continuity of moments, second of eqs. (5.33), to get
L LP
c 1  + c 2 +  = 0
2 2EI
Substitute the first of eqs. (5.39) and eq. (5.40) into the contact condition, eq. (5.37), to get
L3 L2 L3
 c 1 + c 2 +  c 9 = 0
48 8 24
Substitute the displacements eqs. (5.39) and (5.40) into the contact force continuity condition, eq. (5.38), to get
P
c 1 + c 9 –  = 0
EI
These last three equations are solved for c1, c2, and c9. We get c 1 = – P ⁄ ( 4EI ) , c 2 = – ( 3LP ) ⁄ ( 8EI ) , and
c 9 = ( 5P ) ⁄ ( 4EI ) .
Only c7 and c8 remain unknown. The conditions to determine these constants are the continuity conditions
of displacement and rotation, the first and second of eqs. eq. (5.33). Using the results for c1, c2, and c9 these con
tinuity conditions become
L 5L 3 P 5L 2 P
 c 7 + c 8 =  – c 7 +  = 0
2 96EI 32EI
The solution is complete since all of the constants appearing in eqs. (5.30), (5.31), and (5.35) have been
determined. The displacement of the upper beam is
3LP P L
– z 2 – z 3 0 ≤ z ≤ 
16EI 24EI 2
v1 ( z ) = (5.41)
3
5L P 5L P 2 LP P L
–   z – z 2 + z 3
192EI +  32EI 2EI 6EI
 ≤ z ≤ L
2
and the displacement of the lower beam is
5LP 5P
v 2 ( z ) = – z 2 + z 3 (5.42)
16EI 24EI
The assumption that the lower beam contacts the upper beam only at its tip needs to be verified. The condi
tion of no penetration of the contact between the upper and lower beam is
L
v2 ≤ v1 0 ≤ z ≤ 
2
Substitute eqs. (4.41) and (4.42) into this inequality to get
5LP 5P 3LP P
– z 2 + z 3 ≤ – z 2 – z 3
16EI 24EI 16EI 24EI
Multiply this equation by the positive factor EI/P, and after rearrangement we find
z2 L
 –  + z ≤ 0 which is valid for 0 ≤ z ≤ L ⁄ 2
4 2
Thus, the assumption on the contact condition between the two beams is correct. A plot of the displacements of
the two beams is shown in Fig. 5.8. The bending moment in each beam is determined by the formula
M x ( z ) = – EIv″ ( z ) . Using eqs. (5.41), we find for the upper beam
P ( 3L + 2z )
L
0 ≤ z ≤ 
8 2
M x1 =
P( L – z) L
 ≤ z ≤ L
2
and using eq. (5.42) we find for the lower beam
5P
M x2 =  ( L – 2z ) 0≤z≤L⁄2
8
v EI/(P L^3)
z/L
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
0.05
0.1
0.15
0.2
Fig. 5.8 The displacement functions of the upper beam (solid line) and the lower beam (dashed line)
for the two contacting cantilever beams.
M/(P L)
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
z/L
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
Fig. 5.9 The bending moment distributions in the upper beam (solid line) and the lower beam
(dashed line) for the two contacting cantilever beams.
x
px
q 1, Q 1 q 5, Q 5
u ( 0 ) = q1 Vx u ( L ) = q5
θ y ( 0 ) = q2 θ y ( L ) = q6
z My
V x ( 0 ) = –Q1 q 2, Q 2 q 6, Q 6 V x ( L ) = Q5
M y ( 0 ) = –Q2 L M y ( L ) = Q6
Fig. 5.10 Generalized displacements and forces for bending in the xz plane.
generalized forces are related to the beam shear forces V x and V y , and beam moments M x and M y , as shown in
the figures. From the possible boundary conditions for the beam, we either prescribe the generalized displace
y, v
py
q 3, Q 3 q 7, Q 7
v ( 0 ) = q3 Vy v ( L ) = q7
θ x ( 0 ) = q4 θ x ( L ) = q8
z Mx
V y ( 0 ) = –Q3 q 4, Q 4 q 8, Q 8 V y ( L ) = Q7
M x ( 0 ) = –Q4 L M x ( L ) = Q8
Fig. 5.11 Generalized displacements and forces for bending in the yz plane.
To derive the complementary virtual work, we consider the generalized displacements to be prescribed.
Assume the beam displacements u ( z ) and v ( z ) , and rotations θ x ( z ) and θ y ( z ) , to be continuous, satisfying
compatibility eqs.(5.8) and (5.9), and to be consistent with the prescribed generalized displacements at z = 0 and
z = L. Known distributed load intensities p x ( z ) and p y ( z ) can act on the beam. Consider a variation in the gen
eralized forces δQ n with the distributed loads unchanged. Virtual forces δQ n cause a variation in the internal
actions δV x , δM y , δV y , and δM x of the beam. Take these variations to satisfy the differential equations of
equilibrium for bending in the xz plane given by eqs. (5.3) and (5.4); i.e.,
d d
( δV x ) = 0 ( δM y ) – δV x = 0 0<z<L (5.43)
dz dz
with the boundary conditions on the virtual forces for bending in the xz plane given by
δV x ( 0 ) = – δQ 1 δV x ( L ) = δQ 5
(5.44)
δM y ( 0 ) = – δQ 2 δM y ( L ) = δQ 6
Similarly, from eqs. (5.1) and (5.2) the differential equilibrium conditions for bending in the yz plane are
d d
( δV y ) = 0 ( δM x ) – δV y = 0 0<z<L (5.45)
dz dz
and the boundary conditions for bending in the yz plane are
δV y ( 0 ) = – δQ 3 δV y ( L ) = δQ 7
(5.46)
δM x ( 0 ) = – δQ 4 δM x ( L ) = δQ 8
The external complementary virtual work performed by displacements acting through the virtual forces is
8
*
δW ext = ∑ q δQn n (5.47)
n=1
Substitute for the generalized displacements in eq. (5.47) the relationships to the beam displacements listed in
Fig. 5.10 and Fig. 5.11. Also substitute for the virtual forces in eq. (5.47) the boundary conditions given by eqs.
(5.44) and (5.46). After these substitutions we obtain
*
δW ext = – u ( 0 )δV x ( 0 ) – θ y ( 0 )δM y ( 0 ) – v ( 0 )δV y ( 0 ) – θ x ( 0 )δM x ( 0 ) +
u ( L )δV x ( L ) + θ y ( L )δM y ( L ) + v ( L )δV y ( L ) + θ x ( L )δM x ( L )
In the integrand of this equation, distribute the derivative of the sum to the sum of the derivatives of each term,
and then differentiate the product composing each term to get
L
* du dθ y dv dθ x
δW ext =
∫ dz
δV x +
dz
δM y + δV y +
dz dz
δM x +
0
d d d d
u ( δV x ) + θ y ( δM y ) + v ( δV y ) + θ x ( δM x ) dz
dz dz dz dz
(5.48)
From the differential equations of equilibrium for the virtual forces, eqs. (5.43) and (5.45), eq. (5.48) reduces to
L
* du + θ δV + dθ y δM + dv + θ δV + dθ x δM dz
δW ext =
∫ dz y x
dz y dz x y
dz x (5.49)
0
It was assumed that the displacements and rotations satisfied the compatibility conditions given by eqs. (5.8) and
(5.9), so the terms multiplying the virtual shear forces in eq. (5.49) vanish for all z. Hence, we get
L
*
dθ y dθ x
δW ext =
∫ dz
δM y +
dz
δM x dz (5.50)
0
The righthand side of this equation contains quantities defined internal to the beam, so we define the integral on
the righthandsid of eq. (5.50) as the internal complementary virtual work. Thus,
L
*
δW int
∫
≡ [ θ x ′δM x + θ y ′δM y ] dz (5.51)
0
The development from eq. (5.43) to (5.51) shows the external complementary virtual work equals the inter
nal complementary virtual work for the beam having compatible displacements and rotations if the virtual com
plementary forces are statically admissible. The principle of complementary virtual work asserts that the
displacements and rotations of the beam are compatible if the external complementary virtual work equals the
internal complementary virtual work for every statically admissible variation of the forces. If we were to apply
the principle of complementary virtual work to the beam problem, then we would obtain the compatibility condi
tions for the displacements and rotations given by eqs. (5.8) and (5.9).
For the linear elastic beam, the rotation gradients, or curvatures, were related to the bending moments by eq.
(3.72) on p. 92 . This equation is repeated below as eq. (5.53).
θ′ x * –I *
I yy t
1 xy M x + M x
= 
* I * – I * 2)
 (5.53)
θ′ y E 0 ( I xx yy xy * I*
– I xy M y + M yt
xx
elasticity, and M xt and M yt are thermal moments due to a linearly varying thermal strain distribution over the
cross section. If the beam is made of a homogeneous material and the reference modulus is taken as the modulus
of the homogeneous material, then the modulusweighted second area moments reduce to the geometric second
area moments of the crosssectional area. If the change in temperature from the stress free state is spatially uni
form over the cross section for the homogeneous material beam, then the thermal moments vanish, but the ther
mal axial force N t is nonzero. Substitute eq. (5.53) for the rotation gradients in eq. (5.52) to get
* (M + M t ) – I * (M + M t )
I yy x x xy y y
δU 0* = 
 δM x +
E 0 det ( I * )
– I xy* (M + M t ) + I * (M + M t )
x x xx y y
 δM y
E 0 det ( I * )
(5.54)
in which
* I * – ( I * )2
det ( I * ) = I xx (5.55)
yy xy
is the determinate of the matrix of modulusweighted second area moments. (This determinate is positive for real
areas and materials.) The form of eq. (5.54) suggests there is a functional U 0* [ M x, M y ] whose variation is pro
vided by eq. (5.54). Assuming this functional exists, it is called the complementary strain energy density of the
beam having dimensional units of FL/L. The first variation of the functional U 0* [ M x, M y ] is defined by
∂ ∂
δU 0* = ( U * ) δM x + ( U * ) δM y (5.56)
∂Mx 0 ∂My 0
Equating eqs. (5.54) and (5.56), and recognizing equality holds for every admissible choice of virtual moments
δM x and δM y , we conclude that
* (M + M t ) – I * (M + M t )
I yy
∂ x x xy y y
( U 0* ) = 
 (5.57)
∂Mx E 0 det ( I * )
and
– I xy* (M + M t ) + I * (M + M t )
∂ x x xx y y
( U 0* ) =  (5.58)
∂My E 0 det ( I * )
From eqs. (5.57) and (5.58), the functional U 0* [ M x, M y ] should be quadratic in its arguments M x and M y .
Assume that U 0* [ M x, M y ] is of the form
U o* = A 11 M x2 + A 12 M x M y + A 22 M y2 + A 1 M x + A 2 M y (5.59)
in which A 11, …, A 2 are coefficients to be determined. Taking partial derivative of eq. (5.59), we get
∂
( U * ) = 2 A 11 M x + A 12 M y + A 1 (5.60)
∂Mx 0
∂
( U * ) = A 12 M x + 2 A 22 M y + A 2 (5.61)
∂My 0
Compare eq. (5.57) to eq. (5.60) to identify the coefficients
*
I yy *
I xy * Mt – I* Mt
I yy x xy y
A 11 =  A 12 = – 
 A 1 = 
 (5.62)
2E 0 det ( I * ) E 0 det ( I * ) E 0 det ( I * )
Compare eq. (5.58) to eq. (5.61) to identify the coefficients
*
I xy *
I xx – I xy * Mt + I* Mt
x xx y
A 12 = – 
 A 22 =  A 2 = 
 (5.63)
E 0 det ( I * ) 2E 0 det ( I * ) E 0 det ( I * )
Note that coefficient A 12 is determined to be the same value from each comparison. If we have a function of the
form of eq. (5.59), then coefficient A 12 can be identified by the mixed partial derivatives in two ways; i.e.,
∂ ∂ ∂ ∂
A 12 = U * or A 12 = U * (5.64)
∂ M x ∂ M y 0 ∂ M y ∂ M x 0
The order of differentiation is immaterial if all derivatives of the function U 0* [ M x, M y ] concerned are continu
ous. Since we started with the partial derivatives given by eqs. (5.57) and (5.58), a necessary check that the func
tion U 0* [ M x, M y ] exits, is that the mixed partial derivatives obtained from eqs. (5.57) and (5.58) have to be
equal. If the mixed partial derivatives obtained from eqs. (5.57) and (5.58) were not equal, then the complemen
tary strain energy would not exist. Finally, substitute the coefficients given by eqs. (5.62) and (5.63) into eq.
(5.59) to get
1 1
U o* = 
  ( I * M 2 – 2I xy
* M M + I * M 2 ) + ( I * M t – I * M t )M + ( – I * M t + I * M t )M (5.65)
E 0 det ( I * ) 2 yy x x y xx y yy x xy y x xy x xx y y
Equation eq. (5.65) is the complementary strain energy density in the most complex beam we consider. If the
beam is made of a homogeneous material with modulus of elasticity E, the complementary strain energy density
is
1 1
U o* =   ( I yy M x2 – 2I xy M x M y + I xx M y2 ) + ( I yy M xt – I xy M yt )M x + ( – I xy M xt + I xx M yt )M y (5.66)
Edet ( I ) 2
If, in addition to homogeneity, the beam has a symmetric cross section so that the product area moment vanishes,
then the complementary strain energy is
1 M2 M2 M xt M yt
U o* =  x + y + M x + M y (5.67)
2E I xx I yy EI xx EI yy
Finally, if the beam is homogenous, has symmetric cross section, and there are no thermal strains, the comple
mentary strain energy density is
1 M2 M2
U o* =  x + y (5.68)
2E I xx I yy
From eqs. (5.51) and (5.52), the internal virtual work can be written as
L
* = *
δW int
∫ δU 0 dz
0
Assuming a linear elastic material, the complementary strain energy density functional was shown to exist and is
given by eq. (5.65). Now interchange the integral operator and variational operator in the previous equation to get
* = δU *
δW int ( elastic material only ) (5.69)
U* *
=
∫ U dz 0 (5.70)
0
∑ q δQ n n = δU * (5.71)
n=1
where the complementary energy for the beam U * is the integral over the length of the beam of the complemen
tary strain energy density as expressed by eq. (5.70). The complementary strain energy density is written in terms
of the bending moments M x ( z ) and M y ( z ) as given by eq. (5.65). Following the development in Section 2.10
for the system of axially loaded bars, we use equilibrium conditions to determine the bending moments as func
tions of z, 0 ≤ z ≤ L , and in terms of the generalized forces Q n . Hence, from eq. (5.65) the complementary strain
energy density is determined as a function of z with the generalized forces appearing as parameters in the func
tion. Integration of the complementary strain energy density over the length of the beam, refer to eq. (5.70), gives
the complementary energy as a function of the generalized forces; i.e., U * = U * ( Q 1, Q 2, …, Q N ) . The variation
of the complementary strain energy becomes
N
∂
δU * = ∑ ∂ Q U δQ n
*
n (5.72)
n=1
Substituting eq. (5.72) into eq. (5.71), recognizing that the virtual generalized forces are independent, yields the
equation of the generalized form of Castigliano’s second theorem; i.e.,
∂ *
qn = U (5.73)
∂ Qn
A statement of the theorem is given in Section 2.10.
EXAMPLE 5.3 End rotations of a simply supported beam subject to an end moment
A simply supported, uniform beam of length L is subjected to a moment Q 1 at its left end as is shown in Fig.
5.12. The material is homogeneous and linear elastic, the cross section is symmetric ( I xy = 0 ), and there are no
thermal strains. The bending stiffness is EI. Use Castigliano’s second theorem to determine the rotation at (a) the
left end, and (b) the right end.
EI
Q 1, q 1 q2
z
Part (a) Moment equilibrium of the free body diagram of the entire beam
gives the support reaction to be
L Q
R = 1
L
Q1
Hence the moment in eq. (5.74) becomes
R R
z
(a) Free body diagram of entire beam M = – Q 1 1 – 
L
It is important to note that we have determined a moment distribution from equilibrium that contains only the
applied moment Q 1 . That is, the support reaction R is not an independent force, it is a function of Q 1 . The com
plementary strain energy is obtained from eqs. (5.68) and (5.70) with one of the two moments in eq. (5.68) iden
tically zero. Castigliano’s second theorem in the case is
L L
∂ M2 M ∂M
 dz
q1 =
∂ Q 1 2EI∫
 dz =
∫ 
EI ∂ Q 1
0 0
Substitute for the bending moment in this equation the function determined from equilibrium. We find
L L
1 z z Q1 z 2
q 1 =  Q 1 1 –  1 –  dz =  1 –  dz
EI ∫ L L EI ∫ L
0 0
Performing the definite integration on the righthand side of the last equation we get
Q1 L
q 1 = 
 q 1 > 0 clockwise
3EI
Part (b) To find the rotation at the right end by Castigliano’s second theorem when no moment acts at that point,
we assume an external moment Q 2 acts at the right end, apply the theorem to compute the corresponding rota
tion q 2 , then set Q 2 = 0 . That is,
L
M ∂M
 dz
q2 =
∫ 
EI ∂ Q 2
(5.75)
0 Q2 = 0
Equation (5.74) for the moment is still valid in this case with two
L
moments applied to the beam. However, the support reaction R is different Q1 Q2
than in part (a). Moment equilibrium of the free body diagram for the entire
beam gives the support reaction as R R
( Q1 + Q2 ) (b) Free body diagram of entire beam
R = 

L
Substitute this result for the support reaction into eq. (5.74) to find the moment as
z
M = – Q 1 + ( Q 1 + Q 2 ) 
L
Again, it is important to note that we have determined a bending moment distribution from equilibrium that only
contains the applied moment Q 1 and the fictitious external moment Q 2 . Substitute this bending moment into eq.
(5.75) to get
L
1 z z
– Q 1 + ( Q 1 + Q 2 )   dz
q 2 = 
EI ∫ L L
0 Q2 = 0
Performing the definite integration on the righthand side of this result we find
Q1 L
q 2 = –  q 2 > 0 clockwise
6EI
Note that a clockwise moment Q 1 > 0 applied at the left end of the beam results in a counter clockwise rotation
at the right end q 2 < 0 .
EXAMPLE 5.4 Tip displacement of a cantilever wing spar a under distributed load
Determine the vertical tip displacement q 1 of a cantilever wing spar subjected to the distributed lift load of inten
sity p y ( z ) = p 0 ( 1 – z ⁄ L ) , where p 0 is the intensity at the root and L is the span. See Fig. 5.13. The spar mate
y, v
z
p y ( z ) = p o 1 – 
L
q 1, Q 1
z
EI
L
rial is linear elastic and homogeneous, and there are no thermal gradients. The product area moment of the cross
section is zero, and the bending stiffness EI xx = EI is uniform along the span.
Solution Although there is no tip force acting on the beam, to use Castigliano’s second theorem we imagine a
fictitious force Q 1 corresponding to displacement q 1 to act on the spar. We determine the tip displacement via
the theorem, and then set Q 1 = 0 . The complementary energy for this case is given by eq. (5.68) with M y = 0
and eq. (5.70). In mathematical terms the theorem results in
L
M x ∂M x
q1 =
∫ 
 dz
EI ∂ Q 1
(5.76)
0 Q1 = 0
where EI = EI xx . The bending moment distribution is obtained by solving the differential equations of equilib
rium, eqs. (5.1) and (5.2), subject to the boundary conditions on the shear force and bending moment at z = L .
Substitute the distributed load intensity into eq. (5.1) to get
dV z
y = – p 0 1 – 
dz L
Indefinite integration of this equation gives
z2
V y = – p 0 z –  + c 1
2L
The boundary condition on the shear force is V y ( L ) = Q 1 , which allows for the determination of the constant of
integration; i.e.,
p0 L
c 1 = Q 1 + 

2
Hence, the shear force is
p0
V y ( z ) =  ( z – L ) 2 + Q 1 (5.77)
2L
Substitute the shear force from eq. (5.77) into the equilibrium differential equation (5.2) for the moment to get
dMx p0
 =  ( z – L ) 2 + Q 1
dz 2L
Introduce a new independent variable by the definition
ζ≡z–L (5.78)
The boundary condition for the bending moment at z = L is M x = 0 . The value z = L corresponds to ζ = 0 .
This boundary condition determines that the constant of integration c 2 = 0 . Thus, the bending moment distribu
tion in the equilibrium configuration under the distributed load and the fictitious force Q 1 is
p0
M x =  ( z – L ) 3 + Q 1 ( z – L ) (5.79)
6L
Substitute eq. (5.79) for the bending moment in eq. (5.76), recognize that the bending stiffness is indepen
dent of z, to get
L
1 p
0 ( z – L ) 3 + Q 1 ( z – L ) [ z – L ] dz
q 1 = 
EI ∫ 6L
0 Q1 = 0
Now set Q 1 = 0 , and change independent variables according to eq. (5.78), to write the expression for the tip
displacement as
0 0
p0 p0 ζ 5
q 1 =  ζ 4 dζ =  
6EIL ∫ 6EIL 5
–L
–L
p0 L 4
q 1 = 
 (5.80)
30EI
Consider Example 5.4 again, but with a strut attached between the fuselage (simulated by a wall) and tip of the
spar as shown in Fig. 5.14. The strut is a twoforce member, or truss bar, aiding to resist the vertical tip displace
ment of the spar and to reduce the root bending moment in the spar. Determine the vertical displacement of the
tip of the spar using Castigliano’s second theorem.
y, v
z
p y ( z ) = p o 1 – 
L
q 1, Q 1
z
α Fig. 5.14 Strutbraced spar
EA, EI
( EA ) b
q 2, Q 2
L
∂U *
q 1 =  (5.81)
∂Q 1
Q1 = 0
∂U *
q 2 =  = 0 (5.82)
∂Q 2
Q1 = 0
Complementary energy The complementary energy consists of the sum of the complementary energies stored
in each member of the assembly. The action of the distributed load on the spar is to bend it, so energy is stored in
the spar due to bending deformation. But bending of the spar upward causes its tip to displace upward and stretch
the strut. Hence, energy is stored in the strut due to extensional deformation. An axial tensile force in the strut,
results in a compressive force in the spar as a free body diagram of the joint at the spar to strut will show. Thus,
the spar is subject to compressive deformation as well as bending deformation. The energy stored in compression
in the spar must be added to the energy stored in bending. Let N denote the axial force in the spar and N b denote
the axial force in the brace strut, both positive in tension. Then the complementary strain energy is
L
N2
 M2 N b2 L
U*  + x dz +  
=
∫ 2EA 2EI 2 ( EA ) b cos α
0
spar strut (5.83)
Equilibrium Free body diagrams of the joints between the strut and
Q1
fuselage and strut and spar tip are shown in the adjacent figure. Equilib
rium at the joint between the strut and fuselage yields Vy
N b = Q2 (5.84) N α
Mx
Equilibrium at the joint between the spar and strut results in the follow Nb
ing boundary conditions at z = L in the spar. z
L
– N ( L ) – N b cos α = 0 (5.85)
Nb
– V y ( L ) + Q 1 – N b sin α = 0 (5.86)
Q2
M y( L) = 0 (5.87)
Free body diagrams of the joints
The differential equations of equilibrium for the spar are
dN
 = 0 0<z<L (5.88)
dz
dV y z
 + p 0 1 –  = 0 0<z<L (5.89)
dz L
dMy
 – V y = 0 0<z<L (5.90)
dz
The solution to eq. (5.88) subject to boundary condition (5.85) is
N ( z ) = – Q 2 cos α (5.91)
in which we used eq. (5.84) to write the axial force in the strut in terms of Q 2 . The solution to eqs. (5.89) and
(5.90) subject to boundary conditions (5.86) and (5.87) is the same procedure explained in Example 5.4. Omit
ting the details, the solution for the bending moment in the spar is (refer to eq. (5.79))
p0
M x ( z ) =  ( z – L ) 3 + ( Q 1 – Q 2 sin α ) ( z – L ) (5.92)
6L
Equations (5.84), (5.91), and (5.92) represent the equilibrium solutions in terms of the known distributed load
and the independent forces Q 1 and Q 2 . This step is crucial to using Castigliano’s theorem.
Evaluation of displacement equations Substitute the complementary strain energy, eq. (5.83), into eq. (5.81)
to get the following expression for displacement q 1 .
L
N ∂N M ∂M N b L ∂N b
  + x x dz + 
q1 =
∫ EA ∂Q 1 EI ∂Q 1
 
( EA ) b cos α ∂Q 1
0 Q1 = 0
From eq. (5.91) ∂N ⁄ ∂Q 1 = 0 , from eq. (5.92) ∂M x ⁄ ∂Q 1 = z – L , and from eq. (5.84) ∂N b ⁄ ∂Q 1 = 0 . Thus,
the equation for displacement q 1 reduces to
L
1 p
0 ( z – L ) 3 + ( – Q 2 sin α ) ( z – L ) [ z – L ] dz
q 1 = 
EI ∫ 6L
0
in which we used eq. (5.92) again to eliminate M x . Performing the definite integral on the righthandside
Q1 = 0
of the previous equation we get
p 0 L 4 ( Q 2 sin α )L 3
q 1 = 
 –  (5.93)
30EI 3EI
The first term on the lefthand side of this equation is the tip displacement obtained in Example 5.4 when there
was no strut. The second term on the lefthandside of eq. (5.93) represents the reduction the tip displacement
due to the presence of the strut.
Next substitute the complementary strain energy, eq. (5.83), into eq. (5.82) to get the following expression
for displacement q 2 .
L
N ∂N M ∂M N b L ∂N b
  + x x dz + 
q2 =
∫ EA ∂Q 2 EI ∂Q 2
 
( EA ) b cos α ∂Q 2
0 Q1 = 0
From eq. (5.91) ∂N ⁄ ∂Q 2 = – cos α , from eq. (5.92) ∂M x ⁄ ∂Q 2 = – ( z – L ) sin α , and from eq. (5.84)
∂N b ⁄ ∂Q 2 = 1 . Use these same equations, (5.91), (5.92), and (5.84), evaluated for Q 1 = 0 , to replace N , M x ,
and N b , respectively, in the equation for displacement q 2 . The resulting expression for q 2 is
L
( – Q 2 cos α ) 1 p0
 ( z – L ) 3 + ( – Q 2 sin α ) ( z – L ) [ – ( z – L ) sin α ] dz +
q2 =
∫ 
EA
( – cos α ) + 
EI 6L
0
Q2 L
  ( 1 )
( EA ) b cos α
Perform the definite integrations in this equation, rearrange the terms, and recall that q 2 = 0 to get
L cos2 α L 3 sin2 α L p0 L 4
Q 2  +  +  –  sin α = 0 (5.94)
EA 3EI ( EA ) b cos α 30EI
We can solve eq. (5.94) for the redundant force Q 2 in terms of the distributed load intensity p 0 . Then, in
turn substitute the result for Q 2 into eq. (5.93) to find displacement q 1 .
5.5 Problems
1. The uniform cantilever beam shown below is subjected to a uniformly distributed load intensity and is also
restrained by a linear elastic spring at midspan. Neglect the weight of the beam, and determine
v ( z )EI xx
a) The displacement function v ( z ) . Plot the normalized displacement v ( z ) = 
4 )
 versus dimen
( p 0 z max
sionless coordinate z = z ⁄ z max for 0 ≤ z ≤ 1 .
Mx
b) .Plot the normalized bending moment M x ( z ) = 
2
 for 0 ≤ z ≤ 1 .
p 0 z max
Vy
c) Plot the normalized shear force V y ( z ) = 
 for 0 ≤ z ≤ 1 .
p 0 z max
y, v
p y ( z ) = p 0 = constant
64EI xx
z K = 
3

z max
z max ⁄ 2
z max
2. A uniform beam with a rectangular cross section rests on a knife edge at its left end, while the right end is
clamped in rigid disk. The bending stiffness EI xx = EI , the distance between the knife edge and the beam’s
connection to the disk is L and the radius of the disk is R. This disk rotates about a fixed smooth pin through its
center under the action of applied moment Ma as shown. Determine the relation between the applied moment Ma
and rotation angle θ of the disk under the assumption that the angle of rotation θ is small.
Ma, θ
y, v R
θx
EI xx = EI
z
Q1
y
Vy
x τ yz
h/2 Vy z y
τ zy
Mx σz Mx
Mx z
h/2
Vy
t
Fig. 6.1 Shear and normal stresses in a rectangular section beam under general bending.
a slender beam, it is assumed that the normal stress σ z is determined from the flexure formula, eq. (3.27) on p. 77
, with sufficient accuracy when the beam is subjected to shear. The shear stress component τ zy exists if the shear
force Vy is present. Our purpose is to determine the shear stress in terms of the shear force.
The first subscript on the symbol τ zy for the shear stress refers to the direction of the outward normal to the
face on which it acts, in this case the zface, and the second subscript refers to the direction of the shear stress, in
this case the ydirection. A positive value for shear stress τ zy is defined as acting in the positive ydirection on a
positive zface. By the action/reaction law, a positive value for shear stress τ zy means it acts the negative ydirec
tion on a negative zface. See the stress element in Fig. 6.1. Moment equilibrium of the infinitesimal stress ele
ment about the xdirection requires the shear stress component acting on the yface in the zdirection, or τ yz , be
nonzero and equal to τ zy ; i.e., τ yz = τ zy . Shear stress component τ yz is sometimes called conjugate of τ zy . The
sign convention for shear stress τ yz is defined in the same manner as for shear stress τ zy . Shear stress compo
nents τ zy and τ yz are shown acting in their positive senses on the stress element in Fig. 6.1. If the value of the
shear stress is negative, then the senses of the four arrows for the shear stresses in Fig. 6.1 are reversed.
In classical beam theory the shear stress component τ yz is determined by axial force equilibrium of free
body diagrams obtained from selected portions of the beam. Imagine a section of the beam obtained by cutting
the beam with planes perpendicular to the zaxis at z and z + ∆z, ∆z > 0, and a plane perpendicular to the yaxis
h h
at a generic value of y, where –  ≤ y ≤  . The free body diagram of the beam below the y = constant plane is
2 2
shown in Fig. 6.2. The bending normal stress σz acts over a portion of the cross sectional area at z and z + ∆z.
∆F yz
σz ( z ) σ z ( z + ∆z )
y
z F + ∆F
F
h/2
z ∆z
Fig. 6.2 Free body diagram for a selected portion of the beam.
Because of the presence of the shear force, the bending normal stresses at z and z + ∆z are different. The axial
force due to the stress distribution σz acting over a portion of the crosssectional area is
y t⁄2 y t⁄2 M M y
x y dx dy = x
F =
∫ ∫
–h ⁄ 2 –t ⁄ 2
σ z dx dy =
∫ ∫
–h ⁄ 2 –t ⁄ 2 I xx I xx ∫ –h ⁄ 2
yt dy (6.1)
where we substituted the flexure formula for the bending normal stress σz. The integral in the last of these equa
tions for F is the first area moment of the lower portion of the crosssectional area; i.e.,
y
t h 2
yt dy =  y 2 – 
Qx( y) =
∫ –h ⁄ 2 2 2
(6.2)
The action of the top portion of the beam on the bottom portion is represented by the force ∆F yz . Notice that the
surface at y = – h ⁄ 2 is stress free, so that no force or shear stress acts on this surface.; i.e., τ yz = 0 at
y = – h ⁄ 2 . As ∆z → 0 , ∆F yz → 0 , since internal forces are only transmitted over finite areas. This force is
given by
z + ∆z t⁄2
∆F yz =
∫ z
∫ –t ⁄ 2
τ yz dx dz
The integral of the shear stress across the width is defined as the shear flow and is denoted by q; i.e.,
t⁄2
q =
∫ –t ⁄ 2
τ yz dx (6.4)
dF yz

 = q (6.6)
dz
which shows that the shear flow is also interpreted as the shear force per unit length.
The free body diagram of the beam segment shown in Fig. 6.2 is correct with respect to equilibrium in the
axial direction. Equating the forces in the zdirection to zero we get
– F + F + ∆F + ∆F yz = 0
dF dF yz
 +  = 0
dz dz
Substitute eq. (6.3) for F and (6.6) for the second term in this equation we get
d M Qx( y)
x 
+q = 0
dz I xx
Moment equilibrium of the beam requires V y = d M x ⁄ dz , so that the shear flow is given by
Vy
q = – Q x ( y ) (6.7)
I xx
If we assume that the shear stresses are uniform across the width of the beam, then q = τ yz t , and we get
V yQx( y)
τ yz = – 
 (6.8)
I xx t
Since τ zy = τ yz , eq. (6.8) is also the formula for the shear stress in the cross section at y. It is important to note
that Q x ( y ) is the first area moment of a portion of the crosssectional area about the centroidal xaxis. For the
rectangular section, I xx = ( h 3 t ) ⁄ 12 and Q x ( y ) is given by eq. (6.2), so that we finally obtain
3 Vy 2y 2 h h
τ zy =   1 –  –  ≤ y ≤ 
2 ht h 2 2
The shear stress distribution is parabolic in the cross section, with a maximum value of 1.5 times the average
shear stress, where τ ave = V y ⁄ A = V y ⁄ ( ht ) , and the shear stress is zero at the bottom and top of the beam
since τ yz = 0 at y = −
+ h ⁄ 2 . This distribution is sketched in Fig. 6.3. The shear stress distribution is statically
h/2
1.5 τ zy


τ ave
h/2
Fig. 6.3 Parabolic shear stress distribution in the rectangular section beam.
6.2 Shear flows due to transverse shear forces in open section beams
Consider the thinwalled open cross section shown in Fig. 6.4. Let s denote the contour coordinate, which is
t

2
Vy Assume
y 0 ≤ τ zn « τ zs
τ zs
q =
∫τ zs dn
t
Vx τ zn – 
C 2
x
s n
t s q
Fig. 6.4 Shear forces, shear stresses, and shear flow in a general thinwalled open cross section
defined as the arc length of the center line of the wall. The sdirection is tangent to the contour. Let n denote the
thickness coordinate perpendicular to the contour. The thickness coordinate has the range – t ⁄ 2 ≤ n ≤ t ⁄ 2 , where
t denotes the thickness of the wall. Shear forces Vx and Vy are the resultants of the distribution of the shear stress
components τ zs and τ zn , where τ zs is acts tangent to the contour and τ zn acts in the direction normal to the con
tour, that is, in the thickness direction. The shear stress component conjugate to τ zn is τ nz , and on the stressfree
lateral surfaces where n = ± t ⁄ 2 component τ nz = 0 . Since τ zn = τ nz , τ zn = 0 at n = ± t ⁄ 2 as well. In thin
wall bar theory we neglect the thickness direction component τ zn with respect to the tangential component τ zs ,
because τ zn = 0 at n = ± t ⁄ 2 and the wall is thin so that it appears that the thickness shear stress component is
not much different from zero. The shear flow is defined as the definite integral across the thickness of the shear
stress component tangent to the contour; i.e.,
t⁄2
q =
∫ –t ⁄ 2
τ zs dn (6.9)
The shear flow acts tangent to the contour at s, is positive if it acts in the positive sdirection, and has dimensional
units of F/L. It is a function of the contour coordinate s.
The shear flow at s, or q(s), can be related to the shear flow at s = 0, or q(0), by axial equilibrium. A free
body diagram of a beam segment defined by the portion of the contour from s = 0 to s, and the cross sections at z
and z + ∆z is shown in Fig. 6.5. The axial force due to the bending normal stress σz is
q(s)
F
s
q(s)
q(0) q(0)
F + ∆F
∆z
s = 0
s
F =
∫ σ t ds
0
z
where the bending normal stress is evaluated on the contour (n = 0) rather than at a generic point through the
thickness of the wall in the thinwalled beam approximation. That is, we assume the distribution of the normal
stress through the thickness of the wall is small with respect to its value at the contour. Substituting the general
flexure formula for σz, eq. (3.27) on p. 77 , into the above equation we get
I xx M y – I xy M x I yy M x – I xy M y
F = 
2
 Q y ( s ) + 
2
 Qx(s) (6.10)
I xx I yy – I xy I xx I yy – I xy
where the first area moments with respect to the centroidal axes x and y are
s s
Qx(s) =
∫ 0
y ( s )t ds Qy(s) =
∫ x ( s )t ds
0
(6.11)
Since the contour is a curve in the xy plane, the x and y coordinates of the contour are related to the coordinate s;
i.e., x = x ( s ) and y = y ( s ) on the contour. These coordinate functions x(s) and y(s) are required to compute
the first area moments defined by eqs. (6.11). Note that the thickness of the wall can be, in general, a function of
contour coordinates as well, as long as t(s) remains small with respect to the overall crosssectional dimensions.
On the sfaces of the free body diagram in Fig. 6.5, the axial forces are approximated by the shear flow
times the small length ∆z. The shear flows at s = 0 and at s are not the same. Note that the shear flow acting on the
positive zface is assumed positive in the positive sdirection, so that the positive shear flow on the positive sface
is in the positive zdirection and a positive shear flow on a negative sface is in the negative zdirection. Setting
the sum of forces in the axial direction equal to zero in the free body diagram shown in Fig. 6.5 leads to
F + ∆F – F + q ( s )∆z – q ( 0 )∆z = 0
dF
 + q ( s ) – q ( 0 ) = 0 (6.12)
dz
The derivative of eq. (6.10) is
dF I xx V x – I xy V y I yy V y – I xy V x
 = Q
2 y ( s ) + Q
2 x(s)
dz I xx I yy – I xy I xx I yy – I xy
where we used moment equilibrium of the beam about the xaxis, or V y = d M x ⁄ dz , and about the yaxis, or
V x = d M y ⁄ dz . Substituting this last result into eq. (6.12), we get the formula for the shear flow due to trans
verse shear forces as
I xx V x – I xy V y I yy V y – I xy V x
q ( s ) = q ( 0 ) – Q
2 y ( s ) – Q
2 x(s) (6.13)
I xx I yy – I xy I xx I yy – I xy
A symmetric teesection of dimensions h and t with h >> t is shown in Fig. 6.6. The section is subjected to a
5
shear forces V x = 0, V y > 0 . The second area moment I xx =  h 3 t and the product area moment I xy = 0 .
24
Determine the shear flow distribution and the maximum shear stress magnitude.
y
h/2 h/2 s,q s,q
x
C
h 3
 h s,q
4
t, typical
Solution A separate contour coordinate is selected in the web, left flange, and right flange. Choosing a separate
contour coordinate in each branch, rather than using one contour coordinate for the entire cross section, is often a
convenience for subsequent computations. The direction of positive contour coordinate s and, consequently, the
sense of positive shear flow is as shown in Fig. 6.6. Note that we selected the origin of each branch contour coor
dinate at a free edge, so that q(0) = 0 in each branch. For this particular section eq. (6.13) reduces to
Vy
q ( s ) = – Q x ( s )
I xx
s s
3 3 s2
Qx(s) =
∫ 0
y ( s )t ds =
∫ – 4 h + s t ds = t – 4 hs + 2
0
6V y
The web shear flow is quadratic in the branch contour coordinate s, is zero at s = 0, and q ( h ) =   . We set the
5h
derivative of the shear flow with respect to s equal to zero to find the location where the shear flow may have a
maximum magnitude in the web. Hence
dq 2 s 2s 1 3
 = 0 → –   + 1 –    = 0, or s =  h
ds 3h h 3 h h 4
3 27 V y
This is the location of the centroid for the entire section, and q  h =   .
4 20 h
h h h
x ( s ) = –  + s y ( s ) =  0 ≤ s ≤ 
2 4 2
The first area moment about the xaxis is
s s
h 1
Qx(s) =
∫ 0
y ( s )t ds =
∫ 4 t ds = 4 hts
0
Thus, the shear flow in the left flange is linear in the contour coordinate, and at the junction with the web
h 3V y
q  = –   .
2 5h
h h h
x ( s ) =  – s y ( s ) =  0 ≤ s ≤ 
2 4 2
The first area moment about the xaxis is
s s
h 1
Qx(s) =
∫ y ( s )t ds = ∫ 4 t ds = 4 hts
0 0
The shear flow distribution in the cross section is given by eqs. (6.14), (6.15), and (6.16). This distribution is
shown schematically in Fig. 6.7. The shear flows in the two flanges are given by the same equation, and are neg
ative for Vy > 0. In Fig. 6.7 positive values of the flange shear flows are shown, which means that the arrow indi
cating the sense of the shear flow in the flanges is drawn in the opposite direction to what was originally assumed
positive. Note that the shear flow into the junction from the web is equal to the sum of the shear flows going out
of the junction into the flanges. The physical basis of this flow relation at the junction is axial equilibrium at the
junction.
3V y
 
5h
6V y 3V y 3V y
     
Vy q 5h 5h
q 5h
27 V y 6V y
q    
3 20 h 5h
 h
4 Shear flows at the junction
of the web and flanges
27 V y
The maximum shear flow magnitude is equal to   , and occurs in the web at the centroid of the cross
20 h
section. Since each branch of the cross section has the same thickness, the maximum shear stress magnitude also
occurs at the same location as the maximum shear flow. Thus,
27 V y 27 V y
τ max =   =  2  = 2.7τ ave
20 ht 20 2ht
where the average shear stress is defined as the shear force Vy divided by the crosssectional area 2ht. The maxi
mum shear stress is 2.7 times larger than the average shear stress value, or 170% larger with respect to the aver
age!
b s,q
y
y
h/2
Vy C C
x x
h/2
t, typical s,q s,q
b
Fig. 6.8 Thinwalled channel section subjected to vertical shear.
bution in the cross section, and then use static equivalence to determine the resultant of the shear flow distribu
tion.
The xaxis as shown in Fig. 6.8 is an axis of symmetry for the section, so that the product area moment Ixy =
0. The second area moment about the xaxis is
1 h 2 1 1
I xx =  h 3 t + 2 0 +  bt =  h 3 t +  h 2 bt
12 2 12 2
The positive contour coordinate directions and shear flows in each branch of the cross section are defined as
shown in Fig. 6.8. To determine the shear flows for this problem, eq. (6.13) reduces to
Vy s
q ( s ) = q ( 0 ) – Q x ( s )
I xx
where Q x ( s ) =
∫ y ( s )t ds
0
In the lower flange, s = 0 at a free edge so that q(0) = 0, and y ( s ) = – h ⁄ 2 for 0 ≤ s ≤ b . Thus, the first area
moment of the lower flange segment is Q x ( s ) = – ( hts ) ⁄ 2 , and the shear flow is
V y ht
q ( s ) =   s 0≤s≤b (6.17)
I xx 2
The web shear flow at the junction with the lower flange, q(0), is equal to the shear flow of the lower flange
at s = b. This, again, is a consequence of axial equilibrium at the junction. Hence, for the web we have:
q ( 0 ) = ( V y hbt ) ⁄ ( 2I xx ) from eq. (6.17), y ( s ) = – h ⁄ 2 + s for 0 ≤ s ≤ h , and
s
h t
Qx(s) =
∫ – 2 + s t ds = 2 ( – hs + s )
0
2
The upper flange shear flow at the junction with the web, qweb(0), is equal to the web shear flow at s = h.
Hence, from eq. (6.18) we get q web ( 0 ) = q flange ( b ) = ( V y hbt ) ⁄ ( 2I xx ) . For the upper flange: y ( s ) = h ⁄ 2 for
0 ≤ s ≤ b , so Q x ( s ) = ( hts ) ⁄ 2 . The shear flow in the upper flange is
V yt
q ( s ) =  ( hb – hs ) 0≤s≤b (6.19)
2I xx
Note that the upper flange shear flow at s = b is zero. This is as it should be, since the upper flange at s = b coin
cides with a free edge. If this were not the case, then an error would have been made in the shear flow computa
tions, and we would have to go back at this point to find it. The shear flow distributions given by eqs. (6.17) to
(6.19) are shown schematically in Fig. 6.9(a).
Next we determine the resultant of the shear flows in several steps using static equivalence. First, for
straight branches we can integrate the shear flow along the contour to get the branch force. The line of action of
b
the branch force is the contour line. For the lower flange, the branch force is defined by F 1 =
∫ q ( s ) ds . Substi
0
tute eq. (6.17) for the shear flow to get
b V y ht
 V y hb 2 t
F1 =
∫
  s ds = 
0 I xx 2
4I xx
 (6.20)
h
For the web, the branch force is defined by F 2 =
∫ q ( s ) ds . Substitute eq. (6.18) for the shear flow to get
0
h V yt
 V yt 2 h3 h3 V 1 h3t
 ( hb + hs – s 2 ) ds = 
 h b +  –  = y  h 2 bt + 
F2 =
∫
0 2I xx
2I xx 2 3 I xx 2 12
1 1
but I xx =  h 3 t +  h 2 bt , so that
12 2
V y hbt

2I xx V y hb 2 t
F 3 = 

4I xx
y y
V y hbt h C C
 1 + 
 x ⇒ x
2I xx 4b F2 = V y
static equivalence
V y hb 2 t
F 1 = 

V y hbt 4I xx


2I xx
F2 = V y (6.21)
b
For the upper flange, the branch force is defined by F 3 =
∫ q ( s ) ds . Substitute eq. (6.19) for the shear flow
0
to get
b V yt
 V y hb 2 t
 ( hb – hs ) ds = 
F3 =
∫
0 2I xx
4I xx
 (6.22)
Note that the branch forces in each flange have the same magnitude, eqs. (6.20) and (6.22), have parallel lines of
action, but they have opposite senses. The branch forces are shown in Fig. 6.9(b), and these branch forces are
statically equivalent to the shear flows. Since the flange branch forces are the same magnitude, we let F1 = F3 =
1 1
Fflange, and use I xx =  h 3 t +  h 2 bt to find
12 2
V y hb 2 t
3b 2
F flange =   = V y 
 (6.23)
4 1 3 1 2 h + 6hb
2
 h t +  h bt
12 2
The second step in the process of static equivalence is to reduce the coplanar force system consisting of
branch forces to a force and a couple at some convenient point in the cross section. Each time a force is moved to
a parallel line of action a couple is created to maintain static equivalence, as is shown below. If we choose the
center of the web to resolve the force system, we get
a a a
b b b
F
F
F
F
F
d(F )
d a d a d
a
b b b
where Rx and Ry are the x and ydirection components of the resultant force, and Cz is the moment of the couple
about the zaxis due to the force system. The resolution of the coplanar force system at the center of the web is
shown in Fig. 6.10(a). The system in Fig. 6.10(a) is statically equivalent to the planar force system in Fig.
6.9(b).
The third step in the process of static equivalence is to move the force Vy to a parallel position to eliminate
the couple and maintain force equivalence. Force Vy is moved such that the moment of Vy in its new position
about the center of the web is equal to Cz. This single force along a specific line of action is the resultant of the
coplanar force system. That is,
eV y = hF flange
where e denotes the perpendicular distance between the lines of action of Vy in its original position and its final
position. Note that the force Vy must be move to the left of its original position. The result of this final reduction
is shown in Fig. 6.10(b). The resultant is a single force of magnitude Vy in the positive ydirection, whose line of
action is parallel to the web at a distance e to the left of the web. The intersection of the line action of the result
ant with the xaxis is called the shear center, which is abbreviated as S.C. in Fig. 6.10(b).
Vy
Vy
y y
hF flange
C S.C. C
x ⇒ x
static equivalence hF flange 3b 2
e = 
 = 
Vy h + 6b
a) Force and couple at the center of the web b) Resultant of the planar force system
Fig. 6.10 Reduction of branch forces to a single resultant acting at the shear center
The location of the shear center (S.C.) in the cross section is determined by the shear flows due to bending.
The computations given above for the channel section illustrate the general conclusion that the S.C. location
depends on the pattern of the shear flow distribution, and not on the magnitude of the shear force. Shear forces
dV dV
act in the plane of loading to equilibrate the applied loads. (Recall that y = – p y ( z ) and x = – p x ( z ) .) The
dz dz
line of action of the lateral loads p y ( z ) and p x ( z ) must pass through the shear center if the beam is to bend with
out twisting about the zaxis. If the line of action of the transverse loads is not through the shear center, then the
loads will cause torsion in addition to bending. For open cross sections with straight branches and one junction,
the shear center is at the junction where all branch forces intersect; i.e., the moment of the branch forces is zero at
the common junction. Three simple open sections illustrating this point are shown in Fig. 6.11.
S.C.
S.C.
S.C.
Fig. 6.11 Shear center locations for open sections with straight branches and one junction
The location of the shear center for a closed section beam cannot be determined using only the steps outlined
above for the open section. In a closed section the shear flow at the origin of the contour in eq. (6.13) is an addi
tional unknown. To determine the shear flow at the origin of the contour requires consideration of twist of the
section. The procedure to determine the shear center of a closed section is discussed in “Shear center of a closed
section” on page 219 .
For the thinwalled section shown in Fig. 6.12, determine the location of the shear center. The location of
a s,q
y y free edge
2t
C C
2a x x
a 3a/8
2t t
A
2a
Fig. 6.12 Unsymmetrical thinwalled channel section
the centroid is shown in Fig. 6.12, and the second area moments about the centroidal axes are
16 53
I xx =  a 3 t I yy =  a 3 t I xy = – a 3 t
3 24
Solution To find the vertical location of the shear center we can consider shear forces V x > 0 and V y = 0 .
We do not need to compute the shear flows in each branch to find the shear center in this example. A good choice
for the point in the cross section where we would resolve the branch forces can simplify the computations. It is
convenient to use the junction of the lower flange and web, labeled point A, as the point about which to sum
moments of the branch forces, since the only the branch force in the upper flange contributes to the moment
about point A. Then static equivalence of the moment of the branch force and Vx about point A will give the loca
tion of the line of action for shear force Vx.
First the shear flow in the upper flange is determined using the positive senses for q and the contour coordi
nate s as shown in Fig. 6.12. For Vy = 0 and q(0) = 0, eq. (6.13) reduces to
( – I xx Q y + I xy Q x )V x
q ( s ) = 
2
 (6.25)
I xx I yy – I xy
The cartesian coordinates of the contour coordinate s in the upper flange are
5
x ( s ) =  a – s y(s) = a 0≤s≤a (6.26)
8
The first area moments of the portion of the contour from s = 0 to s of the upper flange are
s
Qx =
∫ ( a )2t ds = 2ast
0
(6.27)
s
5 a – s 2t ds = 2t 5 as – s2
Qy =
∫
0 8
8 2
(6.28)
9 Vx 32 5 s2
q ( s ) =  6 – 2a 4 s –  a 3  as –  0≤s≤a (6.29)
97 a 3 8 2
The branch force in the upper flange is the integral of this shear flow over the upper flange; i.e.,
a 23V x
F =
∫ q ( s ) ds = – 
0 97
 (6.30)
Static equivalence means that the moment of the shear force Vx about point A must equal the moment of the
branch force F about point A, as is illustrated in the sketch below. Let ey denote the moment arm for the shear
force. Static equivalence for the moment about point A gives
2aF = – e y V x (6.31)
Although the branch forces for lower flange and web have not been computed, they do not contribute to the
moment about point A. Substitute eq. (6.30) for F into this moment equivalence relation and solve for ey to get
⇔ Vx
2a
ey
A A
46
e y =  a (6.32)
97
This result for ey locates the line of action of the shear force Vx for beam bending. The shear center is on this par
ticular line of action of Vx, and we can locate the exact point on this line of action by considering the separate
problem of V x = 0 and V y > 0 .
( I xy Q y – I yy Q x )V y
q ( s ) = 
2
(6.33)
I xx I yy – I xy
Substitute eq. (6.27) for Qx and eq. (6.28) for Qy into this equation to get the shear flow in the upper flange as
9 V y 53 5 s2
q ( s ) =  6 –  a 4 s – 2a 3  as –  0≤s≤a (6.34)
97 a 12 8 2
The branch force in the upper flange is
a
45
F =
∫ q ( s ) ds = – 
0 194
V y (6.35)
Moment equivalence about point A with the moment arm for shear force Vy denoted as ex, gives
2aF = e x V y (6.36)
See the sketch below. Thus, the location of the line of action of the shear force Vy is
⇔ ex Vy
2a
A A
45
e x = –  a (6.37)
97
The location of the shear center is shown in the sketch below.
S.C. 46
 a
97
45
 a
97
d Area A(s)
y
Vy q(s)
l/2
centroid, C
Mx s
x xaxis
d
Geometry of cross section Beam resultants
Mx
The flexure formula for the axial normal stress is σ z =  y , in which the second area moment of the cross
I xx
section about the xaxis is
tl 3 d4 l d 2
y 2 dA =  + 2  +  +  d 2 = [ 83.33ε + 60.67 ]d 4
I xx =
∫∫ A
12 12 2 2
(6.38)
l + d l + d
2 2
Mx Mx
y  y d dy = 2  d y 2 dy
( M x ) fl = 2
∫ y ( σ dA ) = 2 ∫
z I xx I xx ∫
A fl l l
 
2 2
or
( M x ) fl 2d l 3
l 3
 =    + d –  = 60.67 ( 83.33ε + 60.67 ) ––1 (6.40)
Mx 3 I xx 2 2
l l l l
   
2 2 2 2
Vy l 2
q ( s )ds = 2 q ( s )ds =  ( l + d )d 2 + t  – s 2 ds
( V y ) web =
∫ τ zy tds =
∫ ∫ I xx ∫ 2
l l 0 0
–  – 
2 2
or
( V ) web 1 1 2 l 3 55 + 83.33ε
 =   ( l + d )ld 2 +  t  =  (6.42)
Vy I xx 2 3 2 60.67 + 83.33ε
sêH10 inL
1
ε = 0
ε = 1 ⁄ 50
0.5 ε = 1 ⁄ 10
ε = 1⁄4
qêH500 lbêinL
0.7 0.8 0.9 1
0.5
1
Fig. 6.14 Web shear flow distributions as a function for decreasing web thickness to flange
width ratio.
• The web carries all of the shear force, but no bending moment.
l+d 2 Af = d2
I xx = 2  A f = 968in 4
2
(l + d)/2
The axial normal stress is uniformly distributed over the x
stringer area, and the shear flow is uniformly distributed along
the web. (l + d)/2
Mx l + d Af
σ z =  ±  = ± 170.45 psi
I xx 2
Vy l + d
q =   A f = 454.55 lb/in
I xx 2
The Csection shown Fig. 6.15 is stiffened by four stringers and subjected to a shear force with components
V x = 0 and V y = 40 kN . The stringers are assumed to carry only axial forces and each has the same crosssec
tional area A s = 150 mm 2 . Each branch has a thickness t, and dimensions h = 80 mm and b = 20 mm .
Determine the shear flow distributions in each branch for t = 5 mm and t = 0.5 mm and plot them. Also
determine the maximum shear stress for each thickness.
As b As
s 3, q 3
y y
h
Vy 
2
C x C x
S.C.
h

2 t, typical s 2, q 2 branch shear flows
s 1, q 1
As b As
Solution From eq. (6.13), the shear flow formula applicable to this problem is
Vy
q ( s ) = q ( 0 ) – Q x ( s ) (6.43)
I xx
To use this formula, we should first compute the second area moment I xx of the cross section. Using the thin wall
approximations and the composite body technique, the second area moment about the centroidal xaxis is
h 2 h3t h 2
I xx = 2  bt +  + 4  A s
2 12 2
Note that the stringers are represented by their crosssectional areas concen
ε→0 trated at their centroids, so that only the transfer term in the parallel axis theo
rem affects the second area moment computation for the entire section. Begin
q 1 ( ε )dz
with determining the shear flow in the first branch shown in Fig. 6.15, or the
lower flange. The shear flow at s 1 = 0 is not zero because of the presence of
the stringer. Axial equilibrium of the free body diagram of the lower right
dN1 dz stringer shown in the adjacent sketch gives
h h
From the flexure formula σ z1 = M x –  ⁄ I xx , and the derivative dσ z1 ⁄ dz = V y –  ⁄ I xx . Thus,
2 2
dN Vy
1 = Q xs1 (6.45)
dz I xx
where Q xs1 is the first area moment of the lower right stringer about the xaxis given by Q xs1 = ( – h ⁄ 2) A s .
Hence, the shear flow at s 1 = 0 is q 1 ( 0 ) = – ( V y ⁄ I xx )Q xs1 . Substitute this result for q 1 ( 0 ) into eq. (6.43) to
get
Vy
q 1 ( s 1 ) = –  [ Q xs1 + Q x1 ( s 1 ) ] (6.46)
I xx
s1
h
Q x1 ( s 1 ) = – ( ts 1 ) 0 ≤ s1 ≤ b
2
Combining these results, the shear flow in branch 1 becomes
Vy h
q 1 ( s 1 ) =   [ A s + ts 1 ] 0 ≤ s1 ≤ b (6.47)
I xx 2
The shear flow in branch 2, or the web, is determined from the same gen
eral formula given in eq. (6.43), and the shear flow at s 2 = 0 is determined q 2 ( 0 )dz
separately from the free body diagram of the lower left stringer shown in the
adjacent sketch. Axial equilibrium of the lower left stringer gives
dN q 1 ( b )dz
q 2 ( 0 ) = q 1 ( b ) – 2 (6.48)
dN2
dz
The derivative of the axial force in the stringer is obtained following the same lower left stringer
procedure used for lower right stringer discussed above, which resulted in eq.
(6.45). The result for the lower left stringer is
dN2 Vy
 = Q xs2 (6.49)
dz I xx
where the first area moment about the xaxis of stringer 2 is Q xs2 = ( – h ⁄ 2 ) A s . Calculating the shear flow at the
end of branch 1 from eq. (6.46), using eq. (6.49) for the derivative the axial force in stringer 2, the shear flow at
the beginning of branch 2 from eq. (6.48) is
Vy
q 2 ( 0 ) = –  [ Q xs1 + Q x1 ( b ) + Q xs2 ] (6.50)
I xx
The term in brackets on the righthandside of eq. (6.50) represents the first area moment about the centroidal x
axis of the lower right stringer, the lower flange or branch 1, and the lower left stringer. For the web, or branch 2,
the ycoordinate to the generic point s 2 is y 2 ( s 2 ) = – h ⁄ 2 + s 2 , so the first area moment of branch 2 is
s2
t
=  ( – hs 2 + s 22 )
Q x2 ( s 2 ) =
∫ y ( s )t ds
2 2 2
2
0
It follows from this result, eqs. (6.43) and (6.50), that the shear flow in branch 2 is
Vy h t
q 2 ( s 2 ) =  h A s +  tb –  ( – hs 2 + s 22 ) 0 ≤ s2 ≤ h (6.51)
I xx 2 2
For the upper flange, or branch 3, the general shear flow formula is again given by eq. (6.43). It follows from
the procedure used to obtain the beginning shear flow in branch 2 that
Vy
q 3 ( 0 ) = –  [ Q xs3 + Q x2 ( h ) + Q xs2 + Q x1 ( b ) + Q xs1 ] (6.52)
I xx
The ycoordinate to a generic point on branch 3 is y 3 ( s 3 ) = h ⁄ 2 . Hence, the first area moment of the portion of
branch 3 is
s3
h
Q x3 ( s 3 ) =
∫ y ( s )t ds
3 3 3 =  ts 3
2
0
It follows from this result and eqs. (6.43) and (6.52), that the shear flow in branch 3 is
Vy h
q 3 ( s 3 ) =   [ A s + tb – ts 3 ] 0 ≤ s3 ≤ b (6.53)
I xx 2
Vy h
q 3 ( b )dz Note that the shear flow at the end of branch 3 is q 3 ( b ) =   A s . We can
I xx 2
dz check that this is correct by drawing the free body diagram of the upper right
stringer as shown in the adjacent sketch. Axial equilibrium per unit zcoordinate
dN3 gives
upper right stringer dN
– q 3 ( b ) + 3 = 0
dz
Similar to the results for the derivatives of the stringer forces given in eqs. (6.45) and (6.49), we have
dN3 Vy
 = Q xs3 . Axial equilibrium of the upper right stringer is
dz I xx
Vyh Vyh
–   A s +   A s = 0
I xx 2 I xx 2
which, of course, is satisfied. If axial equilibrium of the upper right stringer were not satisfied, we would have to
go back over our previous calculations to search for an error.
3
( 40 ×10 ) ( 6000 + 4ts 1 )
q 1 ( s 1 ) = 
 0 ≤ s 1 < 20 mm (6.54)
320000
960000 +  t
3
t
( 40 ×10 ) 12000 + 800t + 40ts 2 –  s 22
3
2
q 2 ( s 2 ) =  0 ≤ s 2 ≤ 80 mm (6.55)
320000
960000 +  t
3
and
3
( 40 ×10 ) ( 6000 + 800t – 40ts 3 )
q 3 ( s 3 ) = 
 0 ≤ s 3 ≤ 20 mm (6.56)
320000
960000 +  t
3
The dimensional units of the shear flows are N/mm for the thickness t and branch contour coordinates speci
fied in mm. These shear flows are plotted versus the global section contour coordinate s in Fig. 6.16 for t = 5 mm
(solid lines) and for t = 0.5mm (dashed lines). The global contour coordinate is defined by
s = s1 0 ≤ s 1 ≤ 20 mm
s = s 2 + 20 mm 0 ≤ s 2 ≤ 80 mm
s = s 3 + 100 mm 0 ≤ s 3 ≤ 20 mm
Note that the shear flow distributions exhibit jumps at the stringer locations, and that the shear flow distribution is
q, Nêmm
500
400
300
200
100
s, mm
20 40 60 80 100 120
Fig. 6.16Shear flows in the stiffened Csection for t = 5 mm (solid lines) and t =
0.5 mm (dashed lines)
more uniform in each branch for the thinner section. The tendency to a spatially uniform shear flow in the thin
walled branches between stringers corroborates with the earlier results for the thin web as shown in Fig. 6.14.
From inspection of the Fig. 6.16, the maximum shear flow occurs at the center of the web. Thus,
535.7 N/mm t = 5 mm
q max = q 2 ( 40 ) =
505.3 N/mm t = 0.5 mm
The maximum shear flow is reduced in the thinner section with respect to the thicker section. The maximum
shear stress is estimated from τ max = q max ⁄ t . Hence,
107 MPa t = 5 mm
τ max =
1011 MPa t = 0.5 mm
The maximum shear stress occurs for the thinner section. N.B. A shear stress magnitude of 1011 MPa is very
large. For example, aluminum alloy 2024T4 has an ultimate shear stress of about 280 MPa. Clearly, an alumi
num section of this alloy with t = 0.5 mm would fail.
shear flow formula derived from equilibrium conditions using the flexure formula is also sufficiently accurate.
The beam theory that is developed in this section is sometimes called Timoshenko beam theory to distinguish it
from classical beam theory.
To motivate how we will account for transverse shearing deformations, consider the expression we obtained
for the internal complementary virtual work in Section 5.3. The internal complementary virtual work is given by
the righthandside of eq. (5.49) on p. 142 . Repeating this result we have
L
* = du + θ δV + dθ y δM + dv + θ δV + dθ x δM dz
δW int
∫ dz y x
dz y dz x y
dz x (6.57)
0
The factors multiplying the virtual shear forces in this equation, which are zero in the classical theory, represent
beam shear strains. Let ψ x denote the beam shear strain in the xz plane and let ψ y denote beam shear strain in
the yz plane. That is, we define
du dv
ψx ≡ + θy ψy ≡ + θx (6.58)
dz dz
These transverse shear strains ψ x and ψ y represent the reduction in the right angles between lines elements in
the deformed beam that were originally parallel to the xaxis and zaxis, and the yaxis and zaxis, respectively, in
the undeformed beam. The displacement gradients du ⁄ dz and dv ⁄ dz , and rotations θ y and θ x are assumed to
be very small in magnitude with respect to unity. The beam shears are depicted in Fig. 6.17. Classical beam the
ory is characterized by ψ x = 0 and ψ y = 0 for all values of z.
θy θx
x y
du dv
w  w 
dz dz
π π
 – ψ x v  – ψ y
u 2
2
z z
(a) xz plane (b) yz plane
Fig. 6.17 Transverse shear strains in (a) the xz plane, and (b) the yz plane
For an elastic material the integrand of eq. (6.57) is identified as the variation of the complementary strain
energy per unit length of the beam, or the complementary strain energy density U 0* . Using the definitions of
beam shear strains, the variation in the complementary strain energy density is written as
dθ y dθ x
δU 0* = ψ x δV x + δM y + ψ y δV y + δM x (6.59)
dz dz
We can identify the terms in this expression for the complementary strain energy density as originating from
transverse shear deformation or bending deformation. Decompose the complementary strain energy density as
U 0* = U 0* s + U 0* b (6.60)
where U 0* s is the complementary strain energy density due to transverse shear deformation and U 0* b is the com
plementary strain energy density due to bending deformation. Compare the variation of eq. (6.60) to eq. (6.59) to
get
δU 0* s = ψ x δV x + ψ y δV y (6.61)
and
dθ y dθ x
δU 0* b = δM y + δM x (6.62)
dz dz
The derivation of the complementary strain energy density due to bending for a linear elastic, homogeneous
material was obtained in Section 5.3 as eq. (5.66) on p. 144 . We do not need to repeat this derivation here, since
this beam theory, as does classical beam theory, assumes that the bending normal stresses are given by flexure
formula even in the presence of transverse shear deformations. Neglecting the thermal strain terms, the comple
mentary strain energy density due to bending is obtained as
1
U 0* b =  ( I yy M x2 – 2I xy M x M y + I xx M y2 ) (6.63)
2Edet ( I )
2 and E is the modulus of elasticity.
where det ( I ) = I xx I yy – I xy
To obtain an expression for the complementary strain energy density due to shear for a linear elastic mate
rial, the form of eq. (6.61) suggests that there is a functional of the shear forces, U 0* s [ V x, V y ] , whose variation by
definition is
∂U 0* s ∂U 0* s
δU 0* s [ V x, V y ] =  δV x +  δV y (6.64)
∂V x ∂V y
Comparing eqs. (6.61) and (6.64), the beam shear strains can be identified as
∂U 0* ∂U 0*
ψ x = s ψ y = s (6.65)
∂V x ∂V y
For linear material behavior the beam shear strains are linearly related to the shear forces by expressions of the
form
ψ x = c xx V x + c xy V y
(6.66)
ψ y = c yx V x + c yy V y
where the coefficients c xx , c xy , c yx , and c yy are shear compliances of the beam’s cross section having dimen
sional units of 1/F. From eqs. (6.65) and (6.66), the complementary strain energy density due to shear is deter
mined to be
1
U 0* s =  ( c xx V x2 + 2c xy V x V y + c yy V y2 ) (6.67)
2
where c xy = c yx if eq. (6.66) is to be derived from eq. (6.67) using the relations in eq. (6.65). The question now
is how do we obtain expression for the shear compliances c xx , c xy , and c yy ? To derive these expressions we
return to the free body diagram of an element of the wall of the beam as was used to derived the shear flow for
mula in Section 6.2 given as eq. (6.13) on p. 160 .
6.5.2 Complementary energy density obtained from a twodimensional element of the wall
The complementary strain energy per unit length of the beam is derived again in this subsection, but we start
from a differential element cut from the wall of the beam of dimensions ds × dz × t , where t is the wall thick
ness. Let n z denote the normal stress resultant defined as the integral of the normal stress over the thickness of
the wall; i.e.,
t⁄2
nz =
∫ σ z dn (6.68)
–t ⁄ 2
where n is the coordinate normal to the contour. If the wall is thin with respect to overall crosssectional dimen
sions of the beam, the distribution of the normal stress over the thickness of the wall can be ignored and the nor
mal stress is represented by a uniform distribution through the thickness equal to its value on the contour. For
thin walls then, the normal stress resultant is approximated by n z ≈ σ z t where σ z is evaluated on the contour at s.
A free body diagram of an element of the wall of the beam is shown in Fig. 6.18. The stress resultant n s acting
s, v t
q + ∂q
 ds dz
y n z ds ∂s
n
s, v t
qds q + ∂q
n ds  dz ds
x ∂z
θ dz
qdz ∂n z
n + 
 dz ds
z ∂z
z, w
Fig. 6.18 Free body diagram of an infinitesimal element of the beam wall.
normal to the sface of the element is assumed to be negligible with respect to the axial resultant n z in beam the
ory, and so it is not shown in the free body diagram. Sum the forces acting in the zdirection to zero yields
∂n z
n +  ∂q
 dz ds – n z ds + q +  ds dz – qdz = 0
z ∂z ∂s
In the limit as the element shrinks to zero dimensions we obtain from this equation the differential equation of
equilibrium
∂n z ∂q
 +  = 0 (6.69)
∂z ∂s
q + ∂q
 dz ds – qds = 0
∂z
In the limit as the element shrinks to zero dimensions, we obtain from sdirection equilibrium that
∂q
 = 0 (6.70)
∂z
The displacement of the element in the zdirection is denoted w ( z, s ) and the displacement in the sdirec
tion, or in the direction tangent to the contour is denoted by v t ( z, s ) .The element strains of interest are the axial
normal strain
ε z = ∂w ⁄ ∂z (6.71)
The shear strain is depicted in the adjacent sketch. These displacements must be
continuous and single valued so that no gaps or overlaps of material occur in the s, v t π ⁄ 2 – γ zs
deformed configuration. Continuous, singlevalued displacements and strains
satisfying the straindisplacement relations (6.71) and (6.72) are said to be com ∂w

patible. ∂s ∂v t

∂z
Now assume the beam element has displacements and rotations that are
compatible and satisfy eqs. (6.71) and (6.72). From this compatible deformation z, w
state consider a virtual change in the normal stress resultant δn z and a virtual wall element shear strain
change in the shear flow δq , that satisfy equilibrium conditions (6.69) and
(6.70); i.e.,
∂ ( δn z ) ∂ ( δq )
 +  = 0 (6.73)
∂z ∂s
and
∂ ( δq )
 = 0 (6.74)
∂z
Equation (6.74) implies that the virtual shear flow δq is spatially uniform in the zcoordinate. A shear flow that is
uniform along the length of the beam occurs in the case of a cantilevered beam subjected to transverse forces at it
tip with no distributed loads acting on the beam. Hence, we regard the virtual force system acting on the beam to
consist of only virtual transverse forces acting at the tip of a cantilevered beam, so that the virtual shear forces
δV x and δV y are independent of z. Although this may seem like a limiting situation in which to derive the shear
compliances, in the approximate transverse shear theory being developed here the shear compliances obtained
for this case are assumed applicable to other beam loading situations as well. The complementary virtual work
per unit area of the element is denoted by δÛ 0* , and is determined by the displacements acting through the vir
tual stress resultants. That is, the complementary virtual work of the stress resultants acting on the infinitesimal
element is written as (refer to Fig. 6.18)
z + dz z + dz s + ds
δÛ 0* dsdz = [ w ( δn z ds ) ] + [ v t ( δqds ) ] + [ w ( δqdz ) ] s
(6.75)
z z
Divide this equation by the differential area dsdz , and take the limit as ds → 0 and dz → 0 to get
∂ ∂
δÛ 0* = [ wδn z + v t δq ] + [ wδq ]
∂z ∂s
Distribute the derivative in this last expression and write it as
∂ ( δn z ) ∂ ( δq ) ∂ ( δq ) ∂w ∂v ∂w
δÛ 0* = w 
 +  + v t  +  δn z + t +  δq (6.76)
∂z ∂s ∂z ∂z ∂z ∂s
Since the virtual stress resultants satisfy equilibrium conditions (6.73) and (6.74), the first two terms on the right
hand side of eq. (6.76) vanish. Hence,
δÛ 0* = ε z δn z + γ zs δq (6.77)
in which the axial normal strain and the shear strain are identified from eqs. (6.71) and (6.72). For a Hookean
material the strainstress relations are
1 q
ε z = n z γ zs =  (6.78)
Et Gt
where E is the modulus of elasticity, t the wall thickness, and G is the shear modulus. Using this material law in
eq. (6.77) we get that the complementary strain energy per unit area is
1 1
δÛ 0* = n z δn z +  qδq (6.79)
Et Gt
Equation (6.79) is integrated over the contour of the cross section from s = 0 to s = S , where S is the arc
length of the contour, to obtain the complementary strain energy per unit length of the beam. That is, the varia
tion of the complementary strain per unit length is determined from the variation of the complementary strain
energy per unit area by the definite integral
S
*
δU 0* =
∫ δÛ ds 0 (6.80)
0
The two terms in this complementary strain energy density expression can be identified with bending and shear
ing deformations. The bending deformation effect is represented by the term
S
nz
δU 0* b =
∫ δn
Et
ds z (6.82)
0
Recall that n z = σ z t in the thin wall approximation, and that the bending normal stress σ z is given by the flex
ure formula, eq. (3.28) on p. 77 . If we substituted the flexure formula for σ z and its variation into eq. (6.82) and
carried out the details to obtain the complementary strain energy density due to bending, then we would obtain
eq. (6.63). A result we have already derived. It is the second term in eq. (6.81) that is of interest here. This second
term is the variation of the complementary strain energy density due to transverse shear deformation given by
S
q
δU 0* s =
∫ 
Gt
 δq ds (6.83)
0
From axial equilibrium of an infinitesimal element of the wall of the beam, and using the flexure formula for the
bending normal stress, we derived the shear flow formula which is given in eq. (6.13). We write this formula in a
slightly different form from what is given in eq. (6.13) as
I xx Q y ( s ) – I xy Q x ( s ) I yy Q x ( s ) – I xy Q y ( s )
q ( s ) = q ( 0 ) –  V x –  V y (6.85)
det ( I ) det ( I )
For an open section having a free edge, the origin of the contour coordinate s can be taken at the free edge so that
q ( 0 ) = 0 . If a stringer is located at the contour origin of a branch, then the shear flow q ( 0 ) is obtained in terms
of shear forces V x and/or V y as is shown in Example 6.3. Consequently, we can write eq. (6.85) in the form
q ( s ) = – K x ( s )V x – K y ( s )V y (6.86)
where
I xx Q y ( s ) – I xy Q x ( s )
K x ( s ) = 
 (6.87)
det ( I )
and
I yy Q x ( s ) – I xy Q y ( s )
K y ( s ) = 
 (6.88)
det ( I )
The variation of the shear flow, or virtual shear flow, is obtained from eq. (6.86) as
δq = – K x ( s )δV x – K y ( s )δV y (6.89)
Substituting eqs. (6.86) and (6.89) into the righthand side of eq. (6.84) yields
S
( – K x ( s )V x – K y ( s )V y )
ψ x δV x + ψ y δV y =
∫ 
Gt
[ – K ( s )δV
x x – K y ( s )δV y ] ds (6.90)
0
Equation eq. (6.90) must hold for every virtual force δV x and δV y . Recall that we are considering a cantilever
beam subject to virtual forces equal to δV x and δV y applied at its tip. These virtual forces are independent.
Hence, we conclude from eq. (6.90) that
S
( K x2 ( s )V x + K x ( s )K y ( s )V y )
ψx =
∫  ds
Gt
(6.91)
0
and
S
( K y ( s )K x ( s )V x + K y2 ( s )V y )
ψy =
∫  ds
Gt
(6.92)
0
Compare these expressions for the beam shear strains to those given in eq. (6.66), to finally get the expressions
for the shear compliances. These compliance formulas are
S S
K x2 ( s ) K x ( s )K y ( s )
c xx =
∫  ds
Gt
c xy =
∫ 
Gt
 ds (6.93)
0 0
and
S S
K y ( s )K x ( s ) K y2 ( s )
c yx =
∫  ds
Gt
c yy =
∫  ds
Gt
(6.94)
0 0
The shear compliances given in the above expressions depend on the shear modulus of the material, and the
geometry of the cross section. Note that the dimensional units of the crosssectional functions K x ( s ) and K y ( s )
are 1/L. The dimensional units of the shear modulus are F/L2, so that the dimensional units of the shear compli
ances are 1/F.
Determine the shear compliances for the blade section stiffened by two
y
stringers as shown in Fig. 6.19. The section is made of an isotropic, homo
geneous material with a shear modulus G. Also, determine the influence of
As increasing the stringer area 2 A s relative to the web area ht on the shear
h h»t>0 stiffness.

2
C x
Solution The second area moments for this thinwalled section are
h
 t h3t h 2
2 I xx =  + 2  A s I yy ≈ 0 I xy = 0 (6.95)
12 2
As
Since the second area moment about the yaxis is zero in the thin wall
Fig. 6.19 approximation, this section can only resist bending in the yz plane. Hence,
we consider beam loading such that V y ≠ 0 and V x = 0 . Let the origin of
the contour coordinate s in the web be located at the lower stringer and take the positive direction of s in the pos
itive ydirection. The cartesian coordinates of point s are
h
x(s) = 0 y ( s ) = –  + s 0≤s≤h
2
The first area moments of the portion of the cross section below s are
s
h h ht t
Q x ( s ) = –  A s + y ( s )t ds = –  A s –  s +  s 2
2 ∫ 2 2 2
0
and
s
Qy(s) =
∫ x ( s )t ds = 0
0
From eq. (6.87) the function K x ( s ) = 0 , and from eq. (6.88) the function K y ( s ) = Q x ( s ) ⁄ I xx . Hence, the for
mulas for the shear compliances given in eqs. (6.93) and (6.94) become
c xx = c xy = c yx = 0
and
h
1 Qx(s) 2
c yy = 
Gt ∫ 
I xx
 ds
0
The factor Gt is factored out of the integral in the equation for compliance c yy , since the section is homogeneous
and the thickness of the web is uniform. Substitute for the function Q x ( s ) in the expression for the compliance
c yy to get
h
1 h ht t 2
–  A s –  s +  s 2 ds
c yy = 
GtI xx 2 ∫ 2 2 2
0
1 h 3 A s2 h 4 t A s h 5 t 2
c yy =   +  + 
2 4
(6.96)
GtI xx 12 120
where the second area moment about the xaxis through the centroid I xx given by the first of eqs. (6.95). Equa
tion (6.96) is the result sought. The only nonzero transverse shear compliance is c yy , so the material law for
shear deformation of the beam in the yz plane is ψ y = c yy V y . We write the inverse of this material law as
V y = k yy ψ y , where k yy = 1 ⁄ c yy is the transverse shear stiffness.
To study the influence of the stringers on the transverse shear stiffness k yy , we define the ratio of the cross
sectional area of the stringers to the total crosssectional area A by
α = ( 2 As ) ⁄ A
where A = ht + 2 A s . From the definition of α , the portion of the crosssectional area in the web is
( ht ) ⁄ A = 1 – α
For α = 0 the stringers are not present ( A s = 0 ), and the web resists both bending normal stress and shear
stress. In the extreme case of α = 1 the web thickness t = 0 , and the stringers carry all the bending load with
the web carrying only shear force V y . Introducing the definition of the stringer area and web area in terms of α
and the total area A into the expressions for I xx and k yy we get after some algebra
h2 A
I xx =  ( 1 + 2α ) (6.97)
12
and
5 ( 1 – α ) ( 1 + 2α ) 2
k yy =  GA  (6.98)
6 1 + 3α + 3.5α 2
When there are no stringers ( α = 0 ), the shear stiffness of the blade section is 5GA ⁄ 6 . The shear stiffness of
the section decreases, or the section becomes more flexible in shear, as the stringer area increases as a larger por
tion of the total area ( α increasing from zero, but remaining less than one). A plot of the transverse shear stiff
ness versus α is shown in Fig. 6.20.
kyy êHGAL
2A
0.8 α = s
A
ht
0.6  = 1 – α
A
0.4
0.2
a
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
Fig. 6.20 Transverse shear stiffness of the blade section as the area of the stringers increases relative
to the web area.
EXAMPLE 6.5 Deflection of a cantilevered beam due to bending and shear deformation.
Consider a cantilever beam of length L = 50 in. subjected to a vertical tip force F as shown in Fig. 6.22. The
cross section of the beam is the same as in Example 6.5, and the crosssectional dimensions shown in Fig. 6.19
are h = 10 in. , t = 0.02 in. , and A s = 0.5 in. 2 . The moduli of the material are E = 10 Msi and
G = 3 Msi . Use Castigliano’s second theorem to determine the tip portion of the tip displacement ∆ due to
shear deformation of the web.
∂U *
∆ = 
∂F
The complementary strain energy U * is due to bending in the yz plane and transverse shear in the same plane.
This complementary energy is
y y
F, ∆
x
z
L L
M x2 V y2
U* =
∫ 
2EI xx
 dz +
∫ 
2k yy
 dz
0 0
bending shear
in which the second area moment I xx is given by eq. (6.97), and the transverse shear stiffness k yy by eq. (6.98),
in Example 6.5. Castigliano’s theorem yields
L L
M x ∂M x V y ∂V y
∫ ∫
∆ =   dz +   dz
EI xx ∂F k yy ∂F
0 0
Equilibrium determines the bending moment in terms of the tip force by the equation M x = – ( L – z )F , and
the shear force in terms of the tip force by V y = F . Substitute these results into Castigliano’s theorem to get
L L
1 1
∆ =  [ – ( L – z )F ] [ – ( L – z ) ] dz +  [ F ] [ 1 ] dz
EI xx ∫ k yy ∫
0 0
bending shear
Let ∆ b denote the portion of the tip displacement due to bending, and let ∆ s denote the portion due to shear. The
ratio of the displacement due to shear to the displacement due to bending is
∆ 3EI xx FL
s = 
 
∆b F L 3 k yy
Substitute into this expression eq. (6.97) for I xx and eq. (6.98) for k yy , and perform some algebra to get
∆ 3 E h 2 ( 1 + 3α + 3.5α 2 )
s =    
∆b 10 G L ( 1 – α ) ( 1 + 2α )
2 As 2 × 0.5
α = 
 =  = 0.8333
( ht + 2 A s ) ( 10 × 0.02 + 2 × 0.5 )
Hence, almost 35% of the tip displacement is due to shearing deformation of the web.
6.6 Problems
1. The thickness of each branch in the thinwalled
y
cross section shown below is 3mm and
I xx = 10 5 mm 4 . The shear force V y = 5 kN .
C x
0.6414l
l l
2α
S.C. α A axis of symmetry
α
2α
t
4. Determine the coordinates (ex,ey), with respect to point O, of the shear center (S.C.) for the thinwalled open
section shown below. The second area moments with respect to the centroidal axes x and y are
y
1.5
( x c, y c ) = ( 1.02786, 0.529989 ) y
y S.C.
ey
C x
O x O x
ex
2
t = 0.030 typ.
All dimensions in inches
y y
a
b
T z T x
T , θz
L
The inside radius of the tube is denoted by a and the outside radius by b. Equilibrium requires the internal torque
to be equal to applied torque T at each cross section z = constant, where 0 < z < L . Using the righthand screw
rule, the sign convention for a positive internal torque is that a positive torque acts in the positive z direction on
a positive zface, and by the action/reaction law a positive torque acts in the negative zdirection on a negative z
face. The tube is assumed to made of a homogeneous, isotropic, linear elastic material.
The geometry of deformation of the tube is based on symmetry of the undeformed configuration, symmetry
of the loading, and on isotropic material behavior. Three symmetry arguments concerning the geometry of the
deformation are
1. The pattern of deformation will not vary along the length of the tube.
Any element cut perpendicular to the zaxis of the tube, say of length ∆z, will have the same original geome
try and same loading. Thus, we expect each element to have the same deformation.
2. Each element has a midplane of symmetry in the sense that the deformed geometry at each end must be the
same.
Consider the element shown in Fig. 7.2(a). If we rotate it and the torques 180 degrees about the xaxis we
get the element shown in Fig. 7.2(b). The elements (a) and (b) are identical in original shapes and loadings.
Thus, the deformed geometry of the left end of (b) must be the same as the left end of (a). But the deformed
geometry of the left end of (b) must be identical to the deformed geometry of the right end of (a), since dia
gram (b) is a simple rotation of (a).
D A
B C
C B
x
∆z ∆z
180°
A D
(a) (b)
Fig. 7.2 Symmetry about the midplane of an element of the torsion tube.
3. All radial lines in the undeformed cross section must deform into identical curves. This is a result of axial
symmetry (circular cross section symmetric with respect to the zaxis), and isotropy. Note that tube with a
rectangular cross section would not be axially symmetric.
First, we argue that plane and normal sections in the undeformed tube remain plane and normal to the zaxis
in the deformed tube.
On the basis of symmetry argument (3) end surfaces of elements must dishin or bulgeout as a surface of
revolution, or possibly remain plane as a result of the applied torque. Also symmetry argument (2) implies
both ends do the same. See Fig. 7.3. Further (1) implies each element has the same deformation. But ele
ments which bulgeout or dishin cannot fit together in the deformed geometry to form a continuous tube.
Thus, plane sections remain plane.
dishin bulgeout
∆z ∆z
Second, we argue that each cross section rotates without distortion in its plane.
Consider the element of the tube shown in Fig. 7.4(a). It is assumed a diameter deforms in the leftend plane
as shown. Each diameter would have the same shape by symmetry argument (3). By symmetry argument (2)
diameters on the rightend plane should have the same shape. Rotate the element in Fig. 7.4(a) 180 degrees
about the xaxis to get Fig. 7.4(b). The elements in Fig. 7.4(a) and Fig. 7.4(b) have the same original geom
etry and loading, so the assumed shape of the deformed element should be the same for both. But it is not. If
the family of diameters in the deformed geometry were straight lines, there would be no conflict with sym
metry. Hence, diameters in the undeformed tube remains straight in the deformed geometry, but they may
rotate in their plane. Due to symmetry argument (3) each diameter in the cross section rotates through the
same angle.
T T
x
∆z ∆z
180°
T T
(a) (b)
Fig. 7.4 A diameter in the end plane of the undeformed body cannot distort from a straight line in
the deformed body due to problem symmetry.
The only motion of a circular cross section is, then, a Fig. 7.5 Cylindrical coordinates and
differential line elements.
rotation about the zaxis. Thus, the right angle between line
elements originally parallel to the r and θ directions does
not change, which means the shear strain γ rθ = 0 . Also, for small strains the right angle between the line ele
ments originally parallel to the r and zdirections does not change very much, so shear strain γ rz = 0 . In cylin
drical coordinates the only nonzero strain is γ θz . To compute this shear strain consider an element of the tube of
length ∆z and radius r, where a ≤ r ≤ b . According to the symmetry arguments presented above, a straight line
on the periphery of the tube parallel to the zaxis will deform into a helix. Line AB is a portion of such a straight
line, and when loads are applied this line moves to become A’B’ as shown in Fig. 7.6. For very small ∆z the seg
ment A’B’ can be considered a straight line segment forming the angle γ θz with line A’C’ taken parallel to line
AB. This angle is the change of the right angle between originally perpendicular elements ∆z and r∆θ , and is the
shear strain. From the diagram in Fig. 7.6, we have the relationship between the shear strain and twist of the tube
γ θz
A’
θz
B’ A
r θ
∆θ z C’ x
B
z
∆z
Fig. 7.6 Reduction in the right angle between line elements originally parallel to the
axial and circumferential directions due to twist of the body.
as
r∆θ z = γ θz ∆z
dθ
γ θz = r  (7.1)
dz
This result shows that the shear strain varies in direct proportion to the radius. Since each element of the tube of
length ∆z deforms in the same way as any other, we conclude dθ z ⁄ dz is a constant along a uniform section of
the tube. The quantity dθ z ⁄ dz is the twist per unit length or simply the unit twist.
We use Hooke’s law to relate the shear stress to the shear strain, since we have assumed the material is linear
elastic and isotropic. Hooke’s law is
τ θz = Gγ θz (7.2)
where G denotes the shear modulus of the material. For an isotropic material recall that
E
G = 
2(1 + ν)
where the modulus of elasticity is denoted by E and Poisson’s ratio is denoted by ν. Eliminating the shear strain
by eq. (7.1), we get
dθ z
τ θz = Gr  (7.3)
dz
The stress distribution given by eq. (7.3) leaves the outside and inside cylindrical surfaces of the tube stress
free, as it should. Internally, each differential element of the tube is in equilibrium because τ θz does not change
in the θ direction (axial symmetry) nor does it change in the zdirection (because of uniformity of deformation
pattern along the length of the tube). The shearing stress is the same on each z and θ face. Hence the differential
element is in equilibrium. See Fig. 7.7.
y r
θ
τ θz
τ zθ
τ zθ
z x
θ
z τ zθ = τ θz
T
Fig. 7.7 Shear stresses due to torque
On the end surface of the tube the resultant of the stress distribution must be equal to the applied torque T.
Because of rotational symmetry of the stress distribution, the resultant force due to the shear stresses must be
zero. The only resultant of the stress distribution is the torque
T =
∫ ∫ r(τ
A
zθ ) d A (7.4)
where dA is the element of area and the integral is taken over the crosssectional area A of the tube. Substituting
eq. (7.3) into eq. (7.4) we get
dθ z
T = GJ  (7.5)
dz
where the torsion constant J is defined as
b 2π
π
r 2dA = r 3 ( dθ ) dr =  ( b 4 – a 4 )
J =
∫∫
A
∫∫
a 0 2
(7.6)
The torsion constant J is the same as the polar area moment for a circular annulus, and has dimensional units of
L4. From eq. (7.5) we find the twist per unit length is
dθ z T
 =  (7.7)
dz GJ
For tube of length L, the total angle of twist between the ends is found by integrating eq. (7.7); i.e.,
L
T TL
θz ( L ) – θz ( 0 ) =
∫ 0
 dz = 
GJ GJ
(7.8)
Thinwalled approximations Let the mean radius be denoted by r and the wall thickness be denoted by t. The
relationships between the inside and outside radii to the mean radius and wall thickness are
t
a = r –  1
2 r =  ( a + b )
or the inverse 2 (7.10)
t
b = r +  t = b–a
2
t t 1
A thinwalled tube is quantified by 0 <  « 1 ; e.g.  ≤  . The torsion constant, eq. (7.6), becomes
r r 20
π t 4 t 4 πr 4 t 4 t 4
J =  r +  – r –  =  1 +  – 1 – 
2 2 2 2 2r 2r
πr 4 t t 2 t 3 t 4
J =  1 + 4  + 6  + 4  +  –
2 2r 2r 2r 2r
t
1 – 4  t 2 t 3 t 4
+ 6  – 4  + 
2r 2r 2r 2r
π t t 3 t 2
J =  r 4 8  + 8  = 2πr 3 t 1 + 
2 2r 2r 2r
t
Since the quantity 0 <  « 1 , we can neglect this factor squared with respect to one in the above equation to
2r
get
The variation of the shear stress, eq. (7.9), over the annular section is small for a thin wall. That is, we can
write eq. (7.9) as
Tr r t r t
τ zθ =   1 –  ≤  ≤ 1 + 
J r 2r r 2r
which shows that the range of r ⁄ r is small for a thinwalled section and can be neglected. Thus, the shear stress
is approximated as a uniform distribution across the wall equal to its value at the mean radius.
Tr
τ zθ =  thinwalled circular tube (7.12)
J
Since the shear stress is assumed to be uniform across the wall thickness, we define the shear flow due torsion q
as q = τ zθ t . Substituting eq. (7.12) for the shear stress and eq. (7.11) for the torsion constant, the shear flow is
written as
T rt T
q = 
3
 =  (7.13)
2πr t 2¿
where the area enclosed by the mean radius is ¿ = πr 2 . Equation eq. (7.13) is more general than as presented in
this section for the circular tube. It is applicable to the torsion of thinwalled sections other than the circular tube.
Equation (7.13) is called the BredtBatho formula. These torsion results for the thinwalled circular tube are
depicted in Fig. 7.8., in which we used the contour coordinate s rather than the angle θ to write the shear stress
as τ zθ = τ zs
y T
q = 
2¿ τ zs = q ⁄ t
r
s = rθ
θ
x
t
T
t
¿
Fig. 7.8 Shear flow and shear stress in a thinwalled circular tube subjected to a torque.
y
T
t
0 <  « 1 x
b
z
t T
L
b
Fig. 7.9 Uniform torsion of a bar with a rectangular cross section.
problem of uniform torsion of bars with noncircular cross sections was first obtained by SaintVenant (1855).
The procedure used by SaintVenant, called the semiinverse method, was to assume the form of the displace
ments for the noncircular bar based on the known displacements for the circular section bar. Elasticity theory is
required to fully understand the details of the solution, but elasticity theory is beyond the scope of this text.
Hence, we will only summarize the important aspects of this solution here. The reader is referred to the texts by
Timoshenko and Goodier (1970) and Oden and Ripperger (1981) for indepth discussions.
The deformed bar is shown in Fig. 7.10. As for the circular section under positive torque, the cross section a
z + dz rotates counterclockwise relative to the section at z (Fig. 7.10a), but unlike the circular section bar the
cross section does not remain plane. For noncircular cross sections, the cross section displaces out of its plane as
well as rotates about the zaxis. This outofplane displacement is a result of the loss of axial symmetry of the
noncircular section relative to the circular section bar. (Refer to the third symmetry argument of Section 7.1.)
y T y
x x
z
w
T
w ( x, y ) = –  xy
GJ
T
(a) Rotation and warping of the cross sections (b) Warping of the cross section
Fig. 7.10 Deformation of a thinwalled rectangular section bar under uniform torsion
The outofplane displacement w(x,y) is called warping of the cross section (Fig. 7.10b). For the thinwalled
rectangular section this warping displacement is approximated by
dθ z
w ( x, y ) = – xy  (7.14)
dz
It is assumed in this torsion solution that the cross sections are free to warp as expressed by eq. (7.14). If the bar
cross section is not free to warp as described, then additional normal stresses arise as result of the constraint on
the warping displacement. Constrained warping complicates the state of stress, and is not considered further here
since constrained warping stresses are known to be boundary layer effects in most structural applications. Under
uniform torsion, the twist per unit length is a constant, and from the elasticity solution for the thinwalled section
it is given by
dθ T
z =  (7.15)
dz 1
G  bt 3
3
dθ T
Comparing this result to the standard torsion formula z =  , we find the torsion constant is
dz GJ
1
J =  bt 3 (7.16)
3
Shear stress components due torsion are τzx and τzy, as shown in the adjacent sketch. The dom
τ zy inate stress under free warping of the narrow rectangular section is the shear stress tangent to
t τ zx the long side, τzx, and it is approximated by
dθ z t t
τ zx = – 2G  y –  ≤ y ≤  (7.17)
dz 2 2
b
The shear stress component τzy, is negligible except near the ends at x = ±  , where component τzx must vanish
2
b
because the lateral surfaces of the bar at x = ±  are stress free. The shear stress distribution through the thick
2
ness of the wall is linear, as is shown by eq. (7.17), with a value of zero along the contour line y = 0, and attaining
198 ThinWalled Structures
Uniform torsion of an open section
a maximum magnitude at y = ± t ⁄ 2 . Combining eqs. (7.15) and (7.17), the magnitude of the maximum shear
stress is
3T
τ max = 2 (7.18)
bt
Equations (7.15) to (7.18) are thinwalled approximations. The elasticity solution provides more general for
mulas based on the widthtothickness ratio b/t. These relations are
dθ T T
z = 
 τ max = 2 (7.19)
dz G ( k 1 bt 3 ) k 2 bt
where the dimensionless parameters k1 and k2 are functions of the ratio of b/t. These parameters are listed for var
ious b/t ratios in table on the next page. From results listed in the table, eqs. (7.15) and (7.18) are seen to be good
approximations for b/t >10.
If the shear flow is calculated from the shear stress distribution given by eq. (7.17) we get
t⁄2 t⁄2 t⁄2
– 2G dθ dθ
z y dy = – 2G z
q =
∫ –t ⁄ 2
τ zx dy =
∫ –t ⁄ 2
dz dz ∫ –t ⁄ 2
y dy = 0
That is, the shear flow due to a linear shear stress distribution through the thickness of the wall is zero. The shear
stresses are not zero, but the shear flow is zero for an open section. This is an important difference with respect to
torsion of a closed section. Recall that the shear stress distribution is uniform across the thickness of the wall in a
closed section.
Width to thickness ratio b/t Unit twist parameter k1 Shear stress parameter k2
1.0 0.1406 0.208
1.2 0.166 0.219
1.5 0.196 0.231
2.0 0.229 0.246
2.5 0.249 0.258
3.0 0.263 0.267
4.0 0.281 0.282
5.0 0.291 0.291
10.0 0.312 0.312
∞ 0.333 0.333
Now consider torsion of open section bars of more complex shape as are shown in Fig. 7.11. Understanding
the torsional response of these bars with complex, open crosssectional shapes is facilitated by an analogy to the
response of an initially flat membrane supported on its edges over an opening, where the edges of the opening are
in the same shape as the cross section. The membrane is stretched under a uniform tension, and then subjected to
an internal pressure to cause the membrane to deflect. The deflected shape of this pressurized membrane is anal
ogous to the torsion problem in that level contours on the surface of the deflected membrane coincide with the
lines of action of the of the shear stresses, and that the slope of the membrane normal to the level contour is pro
ThinWalled Structures 199
Bars Subjected to Torsional Loads
b2 b2 b2
t2 t2
b
b1 t b1
t1 t1
1 1 1
J =  ( b 1 t 13 + 4b 2 t 23 ) J =  bt 3 J =  ( b 1 t 13 + 2b 2 t 23 )
3 3 3
Fig. 7.11 Some thinwalled open sections and their torsion constants
portional to the magnitude to the shear stress. Also, the volume between the xy plane and the deflected surface of
the membrane is proportional to the total torque carried by the section. The following text excerpted from Oden
and Ripperger (1981, p. 46) summarizes this analogy.
This analogy was first discovered by Ludwig Prandtl in 1903 and is known’s as Prandtl’s membrane anal
ogy. Prandtl took full advantage of the analogy and devised clever experiments with membranes. By measur
ing the volumes under membranes formed by a soap film subjected to a known pressure, he was able to
evaluate torsional constants. By obtaining the contour lines of the membranes he determined stress distribu
tions.
Torsional constants and the maximum shearing stress can be found for complex cross sections by using the
results for the thinwalled rectangular section. The membrane analogy shows that the torsional load carrying
capacity of the complex open section is nearly the same as the narrow rectangular section, because the volumes
under the membranes are nearly the same if we neglect the small error introduced at the corners or junctions. In
this way, the membrane analogy implies that the complex open cross section has about the same torsional load
carrying capacity as a thinwalled rectangular section with a length equal to the total arc length of the contour of
the complex section.
Since each branch of the open section is equivalent to a narrow rectangular section with the same developed
length and thickness, we can sum the torques carried by each branch in the following way
dθ z dθ z
T = ∑
branches
Ti = ∑ GJ 
i
dz
 = GJ 
dz
Note that the twist per unit length is the same for all branches in the open section, because the cross section is
assumed to be rigid in its own plane. The use of eq. (7.20) for several open sections is shown in Fig. 7.11. Start
ing from eq. (7.18), the maximum shear stress in the ith branch of the section is given by
3T 3GJ i dθ z 3G 1 T Tt
  = 2  b i t i3  = i
( τ max ) i = 2i =  (7.21)
bi t i bi t i 2 dz bi t i 3 GJ J
That is, the maximum shear stress in the ith branch of the open section is the total torque divided by the torsion
constant for the entire section times the thickness of the ith branch. Note that the largest shear stress magnitude in
a builtup open section occurs in the thickest branch.
EXAMPLE 7.1 Torsional response of a thinwalled open section and an equivalent closed section
A thinwall circular tube with contour radius r and wall thickness t is subjected to a torque T. The wall of a
second identical tube is cut parallel to its longitudinal axis along its entire length to make the cross section of this
second tube an open circular arc. See Fig. 7.12. Assume the saw kerf is very small. Compare the unit twist and
maximum shear stress in the closed section to the open section.
small slit
t t
r r
T T
T
 from eq. (7.13), and the torsion constant J = 2πr 3 t
Solution For the closed section the shear flow q = 
2 ( πr 2 )
from eq. (7.11). Hence the maximum shear stress and unit twist are
T dθ z
 T T
τ closed = 
  =  = 

2πr 2 t dz closed GJ G ( 2πr 3 t )
For the open section the developed length b of the contour is essentially 2πr , since the saw kerf is assumed
to be very small. By the membrane analogy the torsional response is the same as the thinwalled rectangular sec
tion of length b and thickness t. The maximum shear stress is given by eq. (7.18) and the torsion constant is given
by eq. (7.16). For b = 2πr , we have
3T
τ open = 2 dθ
z
T
= 
2πrt dz open 1
G  2πrt 3
3
Forming the ratio of the maximum shear stress of the open section to the closed section we find
τ open 3T 2πr 2 t r
 = 2 ⋅  = 3  » 1

τ closed 2πrt T t
Since the ratio of the radius to thickness is greater than ten for a thinwalled section, the above results show that
the shear stress and unit twist of the open circular section are much larger than for the closed section if both sec
tions are subjected to the same torque.
Hence, if a bar is to resist torsional loading, a closed section is preferable to an equivalent open section bar.
That is, the unit twist is smaller for the closed section bar (it is stiffer), and the maximum shear stress is smaller,
than for the equivalent open section bar subjected to the same torque.
z = 0 z = L
T T + dT
z z + dz
tion of torsional equilibrium for this case, where a free body diagram of a differential element of the bar is shown
in Fig. 7.13. Sum the torques acting on the differential element in the figure to get
T + dT – T + t z ( z * )dz = 0 or dT + t z ( z * )dz = 0
Divide the last equation by dz, take the limit as dz → 0 , and note that z * → z in the limit, to get
dT
 + t z = 0 0<z<L (7.22)
dz
Equation (7.22) is the differential equation of torsional equilibrium of the bar, and its is applicable in any
interval along the length in which the distributed torque intensity is a continuous function. If an external point
torque acts on the bar, then eq. (7.22) is not applicable at the point of application of this external point torque.
The internal torque T exhibits a jump in value at the point of application of the external torque, and torsional
equilibrium applied to a free body diagram of this point determines the relationship between the value of the
internal torque to the left of this point to the value of the internal torque to the right of this point. The analysis of
a bar subjected to a point torque is discussed in Example 7.3. The boundary conditions at the ends of the bar are
that we either prescribe the torque or the angle of twist, but not both. That is,
at z = 0 and z = L prescribe either T or θ z but not both. (7.23)
dθ z
T = GJ (7.24)
dz
where GJ is the torsional stiffness of the bar. For the thinwalled circular annulus, the torsional constant J is
given by eq. (7.11), and for the thinwalled open sections the torsion constant is given by eq. (7.20). In subse
quent sections we will obtain the torsion constant J for more complex crosssectional shapes.
Substitute eq. (7.24) for the torque in the differential equation of equilibrium, eq. (7.22), to get
d dθ z
GJ = –t z ( z ) 0<z<L
dz dz
If the torsional stiffness is uniform along the length, then this equation reduces to
2
d θz
GJ 2 = – t z z θz = θz ( z ) 0<z<L (7.25)
dz
This is a second order, linear differential equation for the angle of twist θz and requires two boundary conditions
to determine its solution. These boundary conditions are specified in eq. (7.23), in which the torque is related to
the derivative of the twist angle by eq. (7.24).
EXAMPLE 7.2 A uniform distributed torque acting on a bar with fixed ends.
Consider a uniform bar subjected to a uniform distributed torque of intensity t z ( z ) = t z0 = constant , 0 < z < L .
Each end of the bar is fixed to a rigid support which prevents the twisting rotation of the bar so that θ z ( 0 ) = 0
and θ z ( L ) = 0 . Determine distributions of the angle of twist θz(z) and the internal torque T(z) along the length
of the bar.
c1 z + c2 0≤z<a
θz =
c3 z + c4 a<z≤L
where c1, c2, c3, and c4 are constants to be determined from the boundary conditions. The fixed end condition at
z = 0 yields c2 = 0, and the fixed end condition at z = L yields c4 =  c3 L. The constants c1 and c3 are determined
from the conditions at z = a. First, the angle of twist at z = a must be continuous for otherwise the bar would be
fractured; i.e., θ z ( a – ) = θ z ( a + ) . Imposing this condition of continuity we have
c1 a = –c3 ( L – a ) = –c3 b
Q
GJ ( c 3 ) – GJ ( c 1 ) + Q = 0 or c 1 – c 3 = 
GJ
Now we have two linear, independent equations to deter
θz
Q b Q a
mine c1 and c3. We find c 1 =   and c 3 = –   . Qab

GJ L GJ L GJL
∫
δW ext = Q 2 δθ z ( L ) + Q 1 δθ z ( 0 ) + t z ( z )δθ z ( z ) dz (7.30)
0
The free body diagrams (FBDs) at each end of the bar shown Fig. 7.17 are used to determine the relation of the
tz(z)
Q1 Q2 Q1 T (0) T (L) Q2
z z = 0 z = L
L
FBD at each end of the bar
Fig. 7.17 External torques acting on a bar and the FBDs for the end conditions
external torques to the internal torque in the bar. Thus, torsional equilibrium at each end of the bar requires that
the internal torque T(z) satisfy T ( L ) = Q 2 and T ( 0 ) = – Q 1 . Hence, the external virtual work becomes
L
∫
δW ext = T ( L )δθ z ( L ) – T ( 0 )δθ z ( 0 ) + t z ( z )δθ z ( z ) dz
0
Now distribute the derivative of the product in the in the first term to get
L
dT + t δθ + T d δθ dz
δW ext =
∫ dz z z
dz z
0
The bar is in equilibrium prior to the consideration of the virtual rotation in twist, so the internal torque and exter
nal distributed torque intensity satisfy equilibrium equation (7.22). Hence, the last equation reduces to
L
dθ z
Tδ dz
δW ext =
∫ dz
0
where we interchanged the variational operator and the derivative as discussed in Chapter 2 with eq. (2.34) on
page 32 as the pertinent result. Since the integrand of this last equation contains variables defined internal to the
bar, we define it as the internal virtual work. That is,
L
dθ z
δW int ≡ Tδ dz
∫
dz
(7.31)
0
What the manipulations from eq. (7.30) to (7.31) show is that for a bar in equilibrium, the external virtual
work is equal to the internal virtual work for a kinematically admissible variation in the angle of twist function
θ z ( z ) . This proves the necessary condition that if the body is in equilibrium then the external virtual work equals
the internal virtual work for a kinematically admissible variation in the angle of twist. In problem solving we
assume that equating the external to the internal virtual work for every kinematically admissible twist function is
sufficient for equilibrium of the body. See Section 2.6.2 on page 32 for the general statement of the principle of
virtual work.
The principle of virtual work states that the bar is in torsional equilibrium if
δW ext = δW int for every kinematically admissible δθ z ( z ) (7.32)
where the external virtual work is given by eq. (7.30) and the internal virtual work is given by eq. (7.31) consid
ering torsion only. The mathematical conditions of kinematic admissibility for the virtual angle of twist function
δθ z ( z ) are that it is continuous, its first derivative is piecewise continuous, and that it vanishes at points where
the angle of twist is prescribed. That is, the virtual twist function, or variation in the twist function, must be a
possible twist rotation of the bar.
dθ z
δU 0 = Tδ (7.33)
dz
For a linear elastic material, we can eliminate the torque in this equation using the material law in eq. (7.24) to
get
dθ z dθ z
δU 0 = GJ δ (7.34)
dz dz
The form of this incremental quantity suggests there is a functional U0 of the derivative of the angle of twist such
that its variation is given by eq. (7.34). We denote this functional by U 0 [ θ z ′ ] , where the prime means ordinary
derivative with respect to z. The variation of a functional is presented in the discussion leading to eq. (2.46) on
page 37. From the latter result, we have that the variation of U0 is given by
∂U 0
δU 0 = δθ ′ (7.35)
∂ θz ′ z
Comparing eqs. (7.34) and (7.35) we get
∂U 0
= GJ θ z ′ (7.36)
∂ θz ′
Regarding θ z ′ as a simple variable, we can integrate this last equation, neglect the constant of integration since it
is immaterial here, to get
1
U 0 =  GJ ( θ z ′ ) 2 (7.37)
2
Equation (7.37) is the strain energy per unit length of the bar, or the strain energy density. The total strain energy
stored in the bar due to elastic deformation in twist is the integral of the strain energy density over the length of
the bar; i.e.,
L L
1
U 0 dz =  GJ ( θ z ′ ) 2 dz
U =
∫ 2 ∫ (7.38)
0 0
Notice that the partial derivative of the strain energy density, eq. (7.37), with respect to the derivative of the angle
of twist gives the torque; i.e.,
∂U 0
T = = GJ θ z ′ (7.39)
∂ θz ′
The fact that T = ∂U 0 ⁄ ∂θ z ′ is an important property of the strain energy density. In fact, an elastic material can
be defined as one for which a strain energy density function exists.
The virtual system of torques ( δT ( z ), δQ 1, δQ 2 ) satisfying conditions of equilibrium, eqs. (7.40) and (7.41), is
said to be statically admissible. In this case, eqs. (7.40) and (7.41) are satisfied by
δT ( z ) = constant = – δQ 1 = δQ 2 ,
so that either δQ1 or δQ2 are independent virtual torques, but not both, since δQ1 + δQ2 = 0 for overall equilib
rium of the bar. The external complementary virtual work is defined by
*
δW ext = δQ 2 θ z ( L ) + δQ 2 θ z ( 0 ) (7.42)
Using the boundary conditions, eq. (7.41), for the internal torque this last equation can be written as
*
δW ext = δT ( L )θ z ( L ) – δT ( 0 )θ z ( 0 )
which is equivalent to
L
* d
δW ext =
∫ d z( δT θ ) dz
z
0
Distribute the differential of the product of two functions in the integrand in this equation to get
L
* d dθ z
δW ext =
∫ dz
( δT )θ z + δT
dz
dz
0
From the differential equation of equilibrium for the virtual force system, eq. (7.40), the first term in the inte
grand of this last equation vanishes. Hence, we get
L
dθ z
*
δW ext =
∫ δT d z dz
0
Since this last expression involves only quantities defined internal to the bar, we define the righthand side as the
internal complementary virtual work; i.e.,
L
* ≡ δT
dθ z
δW int
∫
dz
dz (7.43)
0
We have shown in the process of going from eq. (7.40) to (7.43) that, for a compatible angle of twist func
tion, the external complementary virtual work is equal to the internal complementary virtual work for a statically
admissible variation in the torques. That is, we have proved the necessary condition that if the angle of twist
function is compatible, then the external complementary virtual work equals the internal complementary virtual
work for a statically admissible variation in the torques. In problem solving we assume that equating external
complementary virtual to the internal complementary virtual work for every statically admissible system of vir
tual torques is sufficient for the angle of twist function of the body to be compatible. This is a statement of the
principle of complementary virtual work for the torsion bar. A general statement of the principle of complemen
tary virtual work (PCVW) is given on page 47. For the bar in torsion, the PCVW means the angle of twist func
tion θ z ( z ) is compatible if
*
δW ext *
= δW int for every statically admissible virtual torque δT ( z ) (7.44)
where the external complementary virtual work is given by eq. (7.42) and the internal complementary virtual
work is given by eq. (7.43). The principle of complementary virtual work is independent of the material behavior.
T
δU 0* =  δT (7.46)
GJ
This form of the incremental quantity suggests there is a functional of the torque whose variation is given by eq.
(7.46). This functional is called the complementary strain energy density, and is denoted by U 0* [ T ( z ) ] . Based on
the definition of the variation of a functional given by eq. (2.45) and eq. (2.46) on page 37, we would find in a
similar manner that the variation of the complementary strain energy density is given by
∂
δU 0* = ( U * )δT (7.47)
∂T 0
Equating eq. (7.46) and eq. (7.47) for every statically admissible virtual torque gives
∂ T
( U 0* ) =  (7.48)
∂T GJ
Integrating this expression with respect to T (note that we treat the torque as a simple variable) and taking the
constant of integration to be zero when T = 0, we get the complementary strain energy density as
1 T2
U 0* =   (7.49)
2 GJ
The important property of the complementary strain energy density is
∂
θz ′ = (U *) (7.50)
∂T 0
which can be seen by differentiating eq. (7.49) and using (7.24). A comparison of eq. (7.50) with eq. (7.39) for
the strain energy density shows the dual attributes that these energies possess: the derivative of the complemen
tary strain energy density with respect to the torque gives the twist rate, and the derivative of the strain energy
density with respect to the twist rate gives the torque.
Return to the internal complementary virtual work given by eq. (7.45), and use eq. (7.46) to write it as
L
* *
δW int =
∫ δU 0 dz
0
Now interchange the variational operator and the integral operator in accordance with eq. (2.34) on page 32, and
write this equation as
* = δU *
δW int
z x
Vy
q(s)
t(s) s
Vx
T, θ z
Fig. 7.18 Thinwalled, single cell cross section with an arbitrary shaped contour
case of a circular contour the shear flow was related to the torque via Bredt’s formula, eq. (7.13). In Section 7.7
we will determine how to compute the shear flow due to torsion for a closed contour of arbitrary shape. All we
need to keep in mind in this section is that the shear flow is the superposition of the shear flows due to transverse
shear and torsion. To relate the shear flow to the unit twist of the cross section, we use the material law and the
geometry of the deformation.
s, v t
C C*
z q
A x
t(s) B A*
z, w
q
B*
π
 – γ zs
2
∂w w(s+ds,z)
ds
C* ∂s C*
B* vt(s+ds,z)
B* 1 + ∂v t ds C
∂s
∂v t A*
dz vt(s,z+dz) ds
∂z A* vt(s,z)
1 + ∂w dz
B dz
∂z A:(s,z)
w(s,z)
w(s,z+dz)
Fig. 7.20 Tangential and axial displacements of three adjacent points in the wall of the shell.
∂v t ∂w
dz ds
∂z ∂s
γ zs =  +  (7.54)
1 + ∂w dz 1 + ∂v t ds
∂z ∂s
Since the displacement derivatives are small in magnitude with respect to unity for infinitesimal deformations,
we get
∂v t ∂w
γ zs = + (7.55)
∂z ∂s
Combining eqs. (7.53) and (7.55) to eliminate the shear strain gives
q ∂w ∂v t
 = + (7.56)
Gt ∂s ∂z
[ x ( s ), y ( s ) ] . The directions tangent and normal to the contour at A are denoted by t and n, respectively, as is
shown in Fig. 7.21, and the angle between the positive xdirection and the tangent to the contour is denoted by
θ ( s ) . For a differential length ds along the contour at A we have the trigonometric relations
dx dy
cos θ = sin θ = (7.57)
ds ds
y
t(s)
x t
x(s) ds
dy
θ
s = S Α
s dx
n
s = 0 t
θ(s)
y(s) A
n
The projection of the cross section in the deformed cylindrical shell onto the xy plane is assumed not to dis
tort from its original crosssectional shape in the undeformed shell. However, the projected cross section can dis
place in the xy plane and rotate about the zdirection relative to the cross section in the undeformed shell. The
cross section can warp out of its plane in a manner similar to the warping of the rectangular cross section under
torsion discussed in Section 7.2. This warping displacement of the noncircular contour is in contrast to the circu
lar contour (Section 7.1) in which plane cross sections remained plane in the deformed shell because of axial
symmetry of the circular section. Again, the loss of axial symmetry results in warping of the contour.
The assumption that the projection of the contour into the xy plane is in the shape of the undeformed con
tour results in a kinematic relationship between the tangential displacement of the point A on the contour and the
displacements and rotation of the section. First, we reference the displacement and rotation of the cross section to
an arbitrary point labeled O as shown in Fig. 7.22. The tangential displacement vt of point A consists of a rigid
body translation vt1, in which point O moves to O* and A moves to A1, followed by a rotation θ z about O*. The
tangential displacement of A1 to A* is denoted by vt2. Thus, v t = v t1 + v t2 .
The displacement of point O has a horizontal component denoted by u0(z) and a vertical component denoted
by v0(z). Since the angle between the xdirection and the tangent to the contour at s is denoted by the function
θ ( s ) , the projection of the horizontal component in the tangent direction is u 0 cos θ , and the projection of the
vertical component in the tangent direction is v 0 sin θ . Also, the displacement of A to A1 is the same as the dis
placement of O to O*. Thus, the tangential displacement of A to A1 due to translation of the section is the sum of
these projections, or
x θz + θ
O* A*
θ θz
v0 θ
r β
uo A1 v
t2
O
r –vn
v t1
β θ
vt
A
Fig. 7.22 The tangential displacement of a generic point on the contour is related to the rigid body
displacement and rotation of the section
The tangential displacement due to the rotation θ z is determined by the projection of line O*A* onto the tangent
direction. First note that the length of lines OA , O * A 1 , and O * A * are the same because of the rigid section
assumption. The angle between the line OA and the normal direction to the contour at point A is denoted by β.
The tangential component of the displacement of A1 to A* is obtained from the geometry shown in Fig. 7.22 as
We assume that the rotation θ z is small such that sin θ z ≈ θ z and cos θ z ≈ 1 . Also, note that OA cos β = r ,
which is the coordinate of A relative to O in the direction normal to the contour at A. Thus,
v t2 = ( O * A * cosβ )θ z = ( OA cos β )θ z = rθ z
∂v t du 0 dv 0 dθ z
= cos θ + sin θ + r (7.60)
∂z dz dz dz
Substitute this result for the derivative of the tangential displacement in eq. (7.56) to get
q ∂w du 0 dv 0 dθ z
 = + cos θ + sin θ + r
Gt ∂s dz dz dz
Now integrate this last expression completely around the contour to get
q ∂w du 0 dv 0 dθ z
°∫ ds =
Gt °∫
∂s
ds +
dz °∫
cos θ ds +
dz °∫
sin θ ds + ( rds )
°∫
dz
(7.61)
°∫ cos θ ds = °∫ dx = x ( S ) – x ( 0 ) = 0
and
°∫ sin θ ds = °∫ dy = y ( S ) – y ( 0 ) = 0
so that the second and third terms on the righthand side of eq. (7.61) vanish. The first integral on the righthand
side of eq. (7.61) can be done exactly to give
∂w
°∫ ∂ s ds = [ w ( S, z ) ) – w ( 0, z ) ] = 0 ,
since the axial displacement of the material point at s = 0 and s = S is unique. The fourth integral on the right
hand side of eq. (7.61) (integral of the quantity rds around the contour) is twice the enclosed area of the contour.
Hence, the final result from eq. (7.61) is
dθ z 1 q
dz 2¿ Gt °∫
=   ds (7.62)
Equation (7.62) is the formula we set out to derive. It relates the shear flow to the twist per unit length of the bar.
The shear flow can be caused by both transverse shear forces and torque. In this sense, eq. (7.62) is more general
than for torsion only.
y
T
z x
t(s)
T, θ z
Fig. 7.23 Uniform torsion of a thinwalled cylindrical shell with an arbitrary shaped contour.
Axial equilibrium requires uniform shear flow around the contour We assume the shear stress τ zs is uni
formly distributed across the thickness of the wall, based on the analysis of a thinwalled circular tube. The shear
flow is given by q = τ zs t ( s ) , and the shear flow is tangent to the contour. Since there are no axial normal
stresses (no bending nor extension), the shear flow is uniform along the contour. That is,
q = constant with respect to s (7.63)
A free body element from the wall is shown in Fig. 7.24, and axial equilibrium is used to establish the shear flow
is uniform along the contour.
q(s + ds) dz
s
z
s + ds
s q(s) dz
q ( s + ds )dz – q ( s )dz = 0
Fig. 7.24 A free body diagram of an element of the shell for axial equilibrium.
Resultant of the uniform shear flow In general, the resultant of the shear flow resolved at an arbitrary point in
the cross section (again, labeled O) is a force and a couple. Static equivalence gives
Fx =
°∫ ( cos θ )qds Fy =
°∫ ( sin θ )qds T =
°∫ r ( qds ) (7.64)
in which r(s) is the coordinate in the normal direction to the contour at A measured from point O. See Fig. 7.25.
Since the shear flow is independent of the contour coordinate s, it may be brought outside the integral in eqs.
(7.64). We get, using eqs. (7.57) in the process, that
°∫ °∫
F x = q cos θds = q dx = q [ x ( S ) – x ( 0 ) ] = 0 (7.65)
Fy
1
d¿ =  rds T
2
O O Fx
⇔
r qds
θ
ds
ds dy
A θ
dx
°∫ °∫
F Y = q sin θds = q dy = q [ y ( S ) – y ( 0 ) ] = 0 (7.66)
°∫
T = q rds = q 2d¿ = 2¿q
°∫ (7.67)
The last equation is in eqs. (7.67) is called Bredt’s formula, or the BredtBatho formula, and it relates the torque
to the shear flow via the area enclosed by the contour. Since Bredt’s formula is the principal result, we repeat it
below as eq. (7.68).
T
q =  Bredt's formula (7.68)
2¿
For the shear flow independent of the contour coordinate, we find that the unit twist from eq. (7.62) reduces
to
dθ z q ds
dz 2 ¿ Gt °∫
=   (7.69)
Equations (7.68) and (7.69) can be combined by eliminating the shear flow, and we write the result as
dθ z
T = G0 J (7.70)
dz
in which the torsion constant is given by
4¿ 2 (7.71)
J =  single cell section
ds
°∫

t*
and the modulusweighted thickness is given by
G(s)
t* = t (7.72)
G0
Shear modulus G0 is introduced in the definition of torsional stiffness as a reference shear modulus. It is selected
for convenience in cross sections where the material can vary from branch to branch. If the cross section is com
posed of a single homogeneous material, then we take G0 = G, so that t* is the actual wall thickness t. It is impor
tant to remember that the formula for the torsion constant J above is only valid for singlecell, closed section.
The torsion constants for circular section and rectangular section made of a single homogeneous material
and uniform wall thickness are shown in Fig. 7.26. Note that the general formula for J, eq. (7.71), reduces to
value of J for the circular tube given in Section 7.1, eq. (7.11).
t ¿ = ab
¿ = πr 2
ds 2(a + b)
r ds 2πr
°∫ t = 
 a °∫ t = 
t

t t
4 ( ab ) 2 2 ( ab ) 2 t
4 ( πr 2 ) 2 J =  = 
J =  = 2πr 3 t 2(a + b)

a+b
2πr t

t b
Fig. 7.26 Torsion constants for thinwalled, single cell sections with circular and rectangular
contours
Consider the circular section made of two materials as shown in Fig. 7.27. Determine the shear flow, maximum
shear stress, the torsion constant, and the torsional stiffness.
6 6
G = 2.5 ×10 psi G = 5 ×10 psi
Solution The shear flow is computed from Bredt’s formula, eq. (7.68), as
T 10000 lbin.
q =  = 
 = 1591.5 lb/in.
2¿ 2π ( 1 in. ) 2
The shear stress in the left side wall is τ zs = ( 1591.5 lbin. ) ⁄ ( 0.250 in. ) = 6366.2 psi , and in the right side
wall the shear stress is τ zs = ( 1591.5 lbin. ) ⁄ ( 0.125 in. ) = 12732.4 psi . Hence, the maximum shear stress is
12.7 ksi, and it occurs in the 0.125inchthick section.
6
Take the reference shear modulus G 0 = 2.5 ×10 psi. First we compute the denominator of the torsion con
stant given by eq. (7.71).
ds π ( 1 in. ) π ( 1 in. )
°∫ t  = 
*
2.5 ×10 psi
6
 +  = 8π
5 ×10 psi
6
 ( 0.250 in. )  ( 0.125 in. )
G0 G0
Note that the modulusweighted thickness of the right side wall is 2 (0.125 in.) = 0.250 in. From eq. (7.71) the
torsion constant is
4 [ π ( 1 in. ) 2 ] 2 π
J =  =  in. 4
8π 2
T
the torsional stiffness is defined as  , which equals G 0 J via eq. (7.70). Thus, the torsional stiffness for
dθ z ⁄ dz
this example is
T π
 = G 0 J = ( 2.5 ×10 psi )  in. 4 = 3.93 ×10 lbin. 2
6 6
dθ z ⁄ dz 2
EXAMPLE 7.5 Shear center location of a singlecell, closed section having one axis of symmetry.
Consider the thinwalled closed section shown in Fig. 7.28. The contour of this section is an isosceles triangle
with each branch having the same thickness t and having the same shear modulus G. There is a horizontal axis of
symmetry, which is taken as the xaxis. The second area moment about the xaxis is I xx = 300t cm 4 , where t is
specified in cm. Since the shear center lies on this axis of symmetry, we take the shear force components
Much more than documents.
Discover everything Scribd has to offer, including books and audiobooks from major publishers.
Cancel anytime.